96aerostar

[PI00400(ALL)06/95]

36 pica chart:0095000-B

File:01cppia.exUpdate:Tue Aug 29 17:27:26 1995

*[PI00800(ALL)03/95]

thirty-six pica chart:0040299-A


*[PI02300(ALL)05/95]

Table of Contents

Introductory Information ............................... 1

Safety Restraints ............................................ 11

Starting Your Aerostar ................................. 61

Warning Lights and Gauges ....................... 73

Instrument Panel Controls .......................... 89

Steering Column Controls ........................ 109

Features .......................................................... 121

Electronic Sound Systems ......................... 149

Driving Your Aerostar ............................... 185

Roadside Emergencies ................................ 225

Customer Assistance ................................... 245

Reporting Safety Defects ...................... 252

Accessories .................................................... 257

Servicing Your Aerostar .............................. 265

Quick Index .................................................. 351

Index ............................................................... 359

Service Station Information ...................... 380


1

Introductory Information

*[IN00300(ALL)04/95] Ford’s Commitment to You

*[IN00400(ALL)04/95] At Ford Motor Company, excellence is thecontinuous commitment to achieve the bestresult possible. It is dedication to learning whatyou want, determination to develop the rightconcept, and execution of that concept with care,precision, and attention to detail. In short,excellence means being the standard by whichothers are judged.

*[IN00500(ALL)04/95] Our Guiding Principles

*[IN00600(ALL)04/95] ❑Quality comes first. For your satisfaction, thequality of our products and services must beour number one priority.

*[IN00700(ALL)04/95] ❑You are the focus of everything we do. Ourwork must be done with you in mind,providing better products and services thanour competition.

*[IN00750(ALL)04/95] ❑Continuous improvement is essential to oursuccess. We must strive for excellence ineverything we do: in our products — in theirsafety and value — and in our services, ourhuman relations, our competitiveness, andour profitability.

*[IN00800(ALL)04/95] ❑Employee involvement is our way of life.We are a team. We must treat one anotherwith trust and respect.

*[IN00900(ALL)04/95] ❑Dealers and suppliers are our partners. Wemust maintain mutually beneficialrelationships with dealers, suppliers, and ourother business associates.

File:02cpina.exUpdate:Tue Aug 29 17:33:02 1995

2

*[IN01000(ALL)04/95] ❑ Integrity is never compromised. Our conductworldwide must be pursued in a manner thatis socially responsible and commands respectfor its integrity and for its positivecontributions to society.

*[IN01010(ALL)08/95] Things to Know About UsingThis Guide

*[IN01020(ALL)08/95] Congratulations on the purchase of your newvehicle. This guide has information about theequipment and the options for your new vehicle.You may not have bought all of the optionsavailable to you. If you do not know whichinformation applies to your vehicle, talk to yourdealer.

*[IN01030(ALL)08/95] This guide describes equipment and givesspecifications for equipment that was in effectwhen this guide was approved for printing. Fordmay discontinue models or change specificationsor design without any notice and withoutincurring obligation.

*[IN01040(ALL)07/95] NOTES and WARNINGS

*[IN01042(ALL)05/95] NOTES give you additional information aboutthe subject matter you are referencing.

*[IN01044(ALL)05/95] WARNINGS remind you to be especially carefulin those areas where carelessness can causedamage to your vehicle or personal injury toyourself, your passengers or other people. Pleaseread all WARNINGS carefully.

*[IN01046(ALL)05/95] RWARNING


3

*[IN01050(ALL)08/95] Finding Information in This Guide

*[IN01060(ALL)08/95] After you have read this guide once, you willprobably return to it when you have a specificquestion or need additional information. To helpyou find specific information quickly, you canuse the Quick Index, Table of Contents, or theIndex.

*[IN01070(ALL)08/95] The Quick Index at the end of the bookprovides a page number following each itemwhich indicates where detailed information canbe found.

*[IN01080(ALL)08/95] To use the Index, turn to the back of the bookand search in the alphabetical listing for theword that best describes the information youneed. If the word you chose is not listed, thinkof other related words and look them up. Wehave designed the Index so that you can findinformation under a technical term.

%*[IN01090(ALL)08/95] Canadian Owners — French Version

*[IN01100(ALL)08/95] French Owner Guides can be obtained from yourdealer or by writing to Ford Motor Company ofCanada, Limited, Service Publications, P.O. Box1580, Station B, Mississauga, Ontario L4Y 4G3.

%*[IN02400(ALL)04/95] Your Maintenance Schedule andRecord Booklet

*[IN02500(ALL)03/95] The Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet liststhe services that are most important for keepingyour vehicle in good condition. A record log isalso provided to help you keep track of allservices performed.


4

%*[IN02600(ALL)01/95] About the Warranties

*[IN02700(ALL)04/95] Your vehicle is covered by three types ofwarranties: Basic Vehicle Warranty, ExtendedWarranties on certain parts, and EmissionsWarranties.

%*[IN03100(ALL)03/95] Read your Warranty Information Booklet carefullyto find out about your vehicle’s warranties andyour basic rights and responsibilities.

*[IN03250(ALL)03/95] If you lose your Warranty Information Booklet, youcan get a new one free of charge. Contact anyFord or Lincoln-Mercury dealer, or refer to theaddresses and phone numbers on the first pageof this owner guide.

%*[IN04000(ALL)01/95] Buying a Ford Extended Service Plan

*[IN04100(ALL)01/94] If you bought your vehicle in the U.S., you canbuy a Ford Extended Service Plan for yourvehicle. This optional contract provides serviceprotection for a longer period of time than thebasic warranty that comes with your vehicle.

*[IN04200(ALL)01/95] You do not have to buy this option when youbuy your vehicle. However, your option topurchase the Ford Extended Service Plan runsout after 18 months or 18,000 miles. See yourdealer for more details about the Ford ExtendedService Plan.

*[IN04250(ALL)01/95] If you purchased a Canadian vehicle and did nottake advantage of the Ford Extended ServicePlan at the time of purchase, you may still beeligible. See your dealer for the details.


5

%*[IN04650(ALL)06/92] Special Notice

[IN04775(ALL)03/91] NOTICE TO OWNERS OFE-4WD VEHICLES

[IN04805(ALL)03/95] As with other vehicles of this type, failure tooperate this vehicle correctly may result in lossof control or an accident. Be sure to read thespecial driving instructions in the sectionElectronic 4-Wheel Drive (E-4WD) in this book.

%*[IN05100(ALL)06/95] Your Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

*[IN05200(ALL)06/95] Your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is thesame as the warranty number that appears onyour owner card. You should include thisnumber any time you write to Ford MotorCompany about your vehicle.

*[IN05300(ALL)06/95] The Vehicle Identification Number is attached toyour vehicle in the following places:

*[IN05400(ALL)05/95] ❑on the metal tag attached to the top of theinstrument panel on the driver’s side — youcan see the tag by looking through thewindshield from outside your vehicle.

*[IN05450(ALL)10/89]

one inch art:0010558-A

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN/Serial Number)


6

%*[IN05500(ALL)06/95] ❑on the Safety Compliance Certification Label— this label is attached to the left front doorlock facing or the door latch post pillar. It isrequired by the National Highway TrafficSafety Administration and is made of specialmaterial. If someone tampers with it, it willbe destroyed and/or a destruction patternwill appear.

*[IN05515(ALL)05/95] The label contains the name of the manufacturer,the month and year of manufacture, thecertification statement and the VehicleIdentification Number. The label also containsGross Vehicle Weight Rating and Gross AxleWeight Ratings, wheel and tire data andinformation codes for additional vehicle data.For further information about the SafetyCompliance Certification Label and theinformation contained on it, refer to the Index.

%*[IN05545(ALL)06/95] Federal Highway AdministrationRegulation

*[IN05560(ALL)06/95] Regulations such as those issued by the FederalHighway Administration or issued pursuant tothe Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA),and/or state and local laws and regulations mayrequire additional equipment for the way youintend to use the vehicle. It is the responsibilityof the registered owner to determine theapplicability of such laws and regulations toyour intended use for the vehicle, and toarrange for the installation of requiredequipment. Your Ford dealer has informationabout the availability of many items ofequipment which may be ordered for yourvehicle.


7

%*[IN06000(ALL)01/95] Breaking Your Vehicle In

*[IN06100(ALL)03/95] Your new vehicle goes through an adjustment orbreak-in period during the first 1,000 miles(1,600 km) that you drive it. During the break-inperiod, you need to pay careful attention to howyou drive your vehicle.

%*[IN06300(ALL)01/95] ❑Avoid sudden stops. Because your vehiclehas new brake linings, you should take thesesteps:

*[IN06400(ALL)01/95] — Watch traffic carefully so that you cananticipate when to stop.

*[IN06500(ALL)01/95] — Begin braking well in advance.

*[IN06600(ALL)01/95] — Apply the brakes gradually.

*[IN06700(ALL)01/95] The break-in period for new brake liningslasts for 100 miles (160 km) of city driving or1,000 miles (1,600 km) of highway driving.

*[IN06750(ALL)12/93] ❑Wheel lug nuts must be retightened to propertorque specifications at 500 miles/800 km ofnew vehicle operation. Proper torquespecifications are provided in this guide. Alsoretighten to proper torque specification at 500miles/800 km after any wheel change or anyother time the wheel lug nuts have beenloosened.

%*[IN06800(ALL)01/95] ❑Use only the type of engine oil that Fordrecommends. See Engine oil recommendationsin the Index. Do not use special “break-in”oils.


8

%*[IN06900(ALL)04/95] Cleaning the Outside of YourVehicle

%*[IN06950(ALL)04/95] Washing and Polishing Your Vehicle

*[IN07300(ALL)04/95] Wash the outside of your vehicle, including theunderside, with a mild detergent.

*[IN07400(ALL)06/95] DO NOT:

*[IN07500(ALL)04/95] ❑Wash your vehicle with hot water

*[IN07600(ALL)04/95] ❑Wash your vehicle while it sits in directsunlight

*[IN07700(ALL)04/95] ❑Wash your vehicle while the body is hot

*[IN07800(ALL)07/95] Pollen, bird droppings and tree sap can damagethe paint, especially in hot weather. Wash yourvehicle as often as necessary to keep it clean.

*[IN07900(ALL)07/95] Take similar precautions if your vehicle isexposed to chemical industrial fallout.

*[IN07950(ALL)07/95] Paint damage resulting from fallout is notrelated to a defect in paint materials orworkmanship and therefore is not covered bywarranty. Ford, however, believes that continualimprovement in customer satisfaction is a highpriority. For this reason, Ford has authorized itsdealers to repair, at no charge to the owner, thesurfaces of new vehicles damaged byenvironmental fallout within 12 months or 12,000miles (20,000 km) of purchase, whichever comesfirst. Customers may be required to bring theirvehicle in for inspection by a Fordrepresentative.

*[IN08100(ALL)04/95] Polish your vehicle to remove harmful depositsand protect the finish.


9

%*[IN08200(ALL)04/95] Cleaning Chrome and Aluminum Parts

*[IN08300(ALL)04/95] Wash chrome and aluminum parts with a milddetergent. Do not use steel wool, abrasivecleaners, fuel or strong detergents.

%*[IN08400(ALL)04/95] Cleaning Plastic Parts

*[IN08500(ALL)04/95] Some of your vehicle’s exterior trim parts areplastic. Clean with a tar and road oil remover ifnecessary. Use a vinyl cleaner for routinecleaning.

*[IN08600(ALL)04/95] Do not clean plastic parts with thinners, solventsor petroleum-based cleaners.

%*[IN08700(ALL)04/95] If you have your vehicle rustproofed, removeoversprayed rustproofing with a tar and road oilremover. If rustproofing is not removed fromplastic and rubber parts, it can causedeterioration.


11

Safety Restraints

%*[SR00501(ALL)04/95] Important Safety Belt Information

*[SR00600(ALL)03/95] The use of safety belts helps to restrain you andyour passengers in case of a collision. In moststates and in Canada the law requires their use.

*[SR00700(ALL)01/95] Safety belts provide best restraint when:

*[SR00800(ALL)01/95] ❑ the seatback is upright

*[SR00900(ALL)01/95] ❑ the occupant is sitting upright (not slouched)

*[SR01000(ALL)01/95] ❑ the lap belt is snug and low on the hips

*[SR01100(ALL)01/95] ❑ the shoulder belt is snug against the chest

*[SR01200(ALL)01/95] ❑ the knees are straight forward

*[SR01700(ALL)07/95] To help you remember to fasten your safety belt,a warning light may come on and a chime maysound. See Safety Belt Warning Light and Chime inthe Warning Lights and Gauges chapter.

*[SR02100(ALL)07/95] See the following sections in this chapter fordirections on how to properly use these safetybelts. Also see Safety Restraints for Children in thischapter for special instructions about usingsafety belts for children.

%*[SR02200(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Make sure that you and your passengerswear safety belts. Always drive and ridewith your seatback upright and the lapbelt snug and low across the hips.

File:03cpsra.exUpdate:Tue Aug 29 17:35:04 1995

12

*[SR02501(ALL)06/95] RWARNING

Never wear the shoulder belt under thearm. Never swing it around the neck overthe inside shoulder. Never use a singlebelt for more than one person or acrossmore than one seating position. Eachseating position in your vehicle has aspecific safety belt assembly which ismade up of one buckle and one tonguethat are designed to be used as a pair.Failure to follow these precautions couldincrease the risk and/or severity of injuryin a collision.


To reduce the risk of serious injury in acollision, children should always ride withthe seatback upright.


Never drive or ride with a twisted orjammed safety belt. If you cannot untwistor unjam the safety belt, see the nearestqualified technician immediately.


Never let a passenger hold a child on hisor her lap while the vehicle is moving.The passenger cannot protect the childfrom injury in a collision.


Lock the doors of your vehicle beforedriving to lessen the risk of the doorcoming open in a collision.


13

%*[SR03000(ALL)05/95] Combination Lap and ShoulderBelts

*[SR03200(ALL)06/95] While your vehicle is in motion, the combinationlap and shoulder belt adjusts to your movement.However, if you brake hard, turn hard, or ifyour vehicle receives an impact of 5 mph(8 km/h) or more, thelap/shoulder belt locksand helps reduce your forward movement.

*[SR03400(ALL)05/95] After you get into your vehicle, close the doorand lock it. Then adjust the seat to the positionthat suits you best.

*[SR03500(ALL)05/95] Pull the combination lap/shoulder belt from theretractor so that the shoulder portion of the beltcrosses your shoulder and chest. Be sure the beltis not twisted. If it is, remove the twist. Insertthe belt tongue into the proper buckle until youhear a snap and feel it latch. Make sure thetongue is securely fastened to the buckle bypulling on tongue.

*[SR03600(ALL)06/95]

quarter page art:0010018-B

Fastening the front seat combination lap and shoulder belt

[SR03650(ALL)05/95] NOTE: Be sure to read and understandImportant Safety Belt Information at the beginningof this chapter.


14

[SR03800(ALL)06/95]

one third page art:0095046-A

Unfastening the combination lap and shoulder belts —front and rear outboard seating positions

*[SR03900(ALL)07/95] While the belt retracts, guide the tongue to itsoriginal position to prevent it from striking youor the vehicle.

*[SR04000(ALL)05/95] Safety Belts for Front Outboard Passengerand Rear Outboard Seating Positions

*[SR04210(ALL)05/95] Your vehicle is equipped with a dual lockingmode retractor on the shoulder belt portion ofthe combination lap/shoulder safety belt for thefront seat outboard passenger and rear outboardpassengers.

*[SR04220(ALL)05/95] Dual locking mode retractors operate in twoways:

*[SR04230(ALL)06/95] Vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode

*[SR04240(ALL)05/95] In this operating mode, the shoulder beltretractor will allow the occupant freedom ofmovement, locking tight only on hard braking,hard cornering or impacts of approximately5 mph (8 km/h) or more. The retractor can alsobe made to lock by pulling on the belt.


15

%*[SR04250(ALL)08/95] Automatic locking mode

*[SR04260(ALL)07/95] In this operating mode, the shoulder beltretractor will be automatically locked and willremain locked when the combinationlap/shoulder safety belt is buckled, and does notallow the occupant freedom of movement. Thismode provides the following:

*[SR04270(ALL)07/95] ❑A tight lap/shoulder belt on the occupant.

*[SR04280(ALL)07/95] ❑Child safety seat installation.

*[SR04300(ALL)07/95] This mode must be used when installing a childsafety seat on the front passenger seat and rearoutboard seats where dual locking retractors areprovided.

*[SR04310(ALL)07/95] To switch the retractor from the emergencylocking mode to the automatic locking mode,perform the following steps:

*[SR04320(ALL)08/95] 1. Buckle the lap/shoulder combination belt.

*[SR04330(ALL)08/95] 2. Grasp the shoulder portion of the belt andpull downward until all of the belt isextracted and, when allowed to retract, aclicking sound is heard. At this time, the beltretractor is in the automatic locking mode(child restraint mode).

*[SR04340(ALL)08/95] 3. A clicking sound will continue to be heardas the belt is allowed to retract. Thisindicates that the retractor is in theautomatic locking mode.

*[SR04350(ALL)07/95] NOTE: When the combination lap/shoulderbelt is unbuckled and allowed toretract completely, the retractor willswitch to the vehicle sensitive(emergency) locking mode. See thedetailed instructions under Safety Seatsfor Children in this chapter.


16

[SR04375(ALL)08/95] All Two Passenger Bench or Bedseat

*[SR04400(ALL)12/91] In addition to anchorages in the floor and roofstructures, some rear safety belts have adetachable anchor mounted to the outboard sideof the rear seats. This should remain attached,except when removing the rear seats.

*[SR04500(ALL)11/93] The second row passenger side outboard seatingposition uses a hook above the sliding/cargodoor to stow the shoulder safety belt whenentering or exiting the vehicle or when it is notbeing used.

*[SR04525(ALL)11/93] NOTE: When the belt is stowed using thehook, DO NOT use the hanging belt asan assist when entering the vehicle.


17

[SR04550(ALL)08/95]

three fourths page art:0020880-C

Proper stowage of shoulder safety belt

[SR04800(ALL)06/95] Disengaging rear seat safety belts for seatremoval

[SR04850(ALL)05/95] In order to remove the rear seat, the safety beltmust be disengaged from the seat. To disengagethe safety belt from the seat, insert a key orsmall screwdriver into the slot provided on thedetachable anchor. Then lift upward.


18

[SR05000(ALL)06/95]

three fourths page art:0095047-A

Disengaging safety belt for rear seat removal


19

[SR05200(ALL)03/91] Whenever a rear seat has been removed, thetongue end of the detachable anchor must becorrectly stowed. See the following illustration.

[SR05300(ALL)03/93]


Rear seat shoulder safety belt — stowage (with seatremoved)


20


When reinstalling a rear seat in yourvehicle it must be placed in its originalposition. Improper installation of the seatwill prevent correct use of the safety beltsand could increase the risk of injury.Refer to the warning label on the seatbelt.

*[SR05700(ALL)03/95] After installing the rear seat, make sure thesafety belt is not twisted before you insert it intothe detachable anchor. A twisted safety belt maycause the retractor to not work properly. Theninsert the detachable anchor tongue into thedetachable anchor until you hear a “snap” andfeel the latch engage.

%*[SR06800(ALL)05/95] Adjustable Lap Belts Without Retractors

[SR07000(ALL)06/95] On the center seat of the rear three-passengerseats you will find a lap-belt without a retractor.You must adjust the lap belt to fit snugly and aslow as possible around your hips. Do not wearthe lap belt around your waist.

*[SR07400(ALL)05/95]

one third page art:0020638-C

Fastening and unfastening occupant safety lap belts


21

*[SR07500(ALL)06/95] Pull the belt across your hips and insert thetongue into the correct buckle on your seatuntil you hear a snap and feel it lock. Make surethe buckle is securely fastened.

%*[SR07700(ALL)06/95] If you need to lengthen the belt, unfasten it andtip the belt tongue at a right angle to the belt.Pull the belt tongue over your lap until itreaches the buckle.

*[SR07800(ALL)06/95] If you need to shorten the belt, pull on the looseend of the webbing until the belt fits snugly.

[SR07900(ALL)08/95]

one third page art:0000029-F

Unfastening the lap belts for the center front and centerrear seating positions — end release buckle shown (otherbuckle similar)

*[SR08600(ALL)08/95] To unfasten the belt, push the release button onthe end of the buckle. This allows the tongue tounlatch from the buckle.


The lap belts should fit snugly and as lowas possible around the hips, not aroundthe waist.


22

%*[SR09600(ALL)07/95] Safety Belt Extension Assembly

*[SR09700(ALL)07/95] For some people, the safety belt may be tooshort even when it is fully extended. You canadd about eight inches (20 cm) to the belt lengthwith a safety belt extension assembly (partnumber 611C22). Safety belt extensions areavailable at no cost from your dealer.

*[SR09750(ALL)08/95] Use only extensions manufactured by the samesupplier as the safety belt. Manufactureridentification is located at the end of thewebbing on the label. Also, use the safety beltextension only if the safety belt is too short foryou when fully extended. Do not use extensionto change the fit of the shoulder belt across thetorso.

%*[SR09775(ALL)07/95] Safety Belt Maintenance

*[SR09795(ALL)07/95] Check the safety belt systems periodically tomake sure that they work properly and are notdamaged.


Failure to follow these instructions willaffect the performance of the safety beltsand increase the risk of personal injury.


23

%*[SR09805(ALL)07/95] All safety belt assemblies, including retractors,buckles, front seat belt buckle support assemblies(slide bar) (if equipped), child safety seat tetherbracket assemblies (if equipped), and attachinghardware, should be inspected after anycollision. Ford recommends that all safety beltassemblies used in vehicles involved in acollision be replaced. However, if the collisionwas minor and a qualified technician finds thatthe belts do not show damage and continue tooperate properly, they do not need to bereplaced. Safety belt assemblies not in useduring a collision should also be inspected andreplaced if either damage or improper operationis noted.

%*[SR09825(ALL)06/95] Cleaning the Safety Belts

*[SR09850(ALL)06/95] Clean the safety belts with any mild soapsolution that is recommended for cleaningupholstery or carpets. Do not bleach or dye thebelt webbing because this may weaken it.

%*[SR09875(ALL)08/95] How to Untwist or Unjam a Safety BeltRetractor

*[SR09900(ALL)08/95] If you should jam the lap belt retractor byallowing the belt to retract when it is twisted,you can free the webbing with this procedure:

*[SR09925(ALL)08/95] 1. Pull on the belt with both hands to tighten iton the retractor spool.

*[SR09950(ALL)08/95] 2. Feed the belt back into the retractor until itis completely retracted. Repeat previous stepif necessary.

*[SR09975(ALL)08/95] 3. Pull the belt out of its holder as far as it willgo and untwist the belt or remove the objectthat is jamming the belt. Let the belt retract.

*[SR09985(ALL)08/95] 4. Then, pull the belt out and let it retractseveral times to make sure that the beltworks properly.


24

[SR10000(ALL)08/95] For Twisted Rear Outboard CombinationLap and Shoulder Safety Belts —Detachable Anchor

[SR10020(ALL)08/95] Disengage the detachable anchor tongue fromthe detachable anchor, remove the twist andre-install the detachable anchor tongue end intothe detachable anchor until you hear a snap andfeel the latch engage.

*[SR10040(ALL)08/95] Procedure to Correct a Twisted Safety Beltat the “D” Ring (if so equipped) Frontand/or Rear Outboard Seating Positions

*[SR10060(ALL)08/95] NOTE: The restraint system shown in thefollowing figures may be different thanthe restraint system in your vehicle.However, use these figures and thisprocedure to correct a twisted safetybelt at any outboard seating positionthat has a “D” ring.

*[SR10080(ALL)08/95]

half page art:0060598-C


25

*[SR10100(ALL)05/95] 1. Grasp the belt webbing at the “D” ring. SeeFigure 2.

*[SR10120(ALL)08/95]

half page art:0060599-D

*[SR10140(ALL)05/95] 2. Rotate and fold the belt webbing over itselfas required to remove the twist.

*[SR10160(ALL)08/95] 3. Feed the folded portion of the belt throughthe “D” ring.


26

*[SR10180(ALL)05/95] 4. When completed, the safety belt should looklike Figure 3.

*[SR10200(ALL)08/95]

half page art:0060600-D

%*[SR10300(ALL)06/95] Air Bag Supplemental RestraintSystem (SRS)

*[SR10600(ALL)05/95] The driver air bag is a Supplemental RestraintSystem (SRS), provided in addition to the driverlap/shoulder belt, and is designed tosupplement the protection provided to aproperly belted driver in moderate to severefrontal collisions. The supplemental air bagsystem does not provide restraint to the lowerbody.


27

%*[SR10650(ALL)05/95] The Importance of Wearing Safety Belts


Safety belts must be worn by all vehicleoccupants to be properly restrained andhelp reduce the risk of injury in acollision.


All occupants of the vehicle, including thedriver, should always wear their safetybelts, even when an air bag SupplementalRestraint System is provided.

*[SR10900(ALL)01/95] There are four very important reasons to usesafety belts even with an air bag system. Useyour safety belts to:

*[SR11000(ALL)01/95] ❑help keep you in the proper position (awayfrom the air bag) when it inflates

*[SR11100(ALL)01/95] ❑ reduce the risk of harm in rollover, side orrear impact collisions, because an air bag isnot designed to inflate in such situations

*[SR11200(ALL)01/95] ❑ reduce the risk of harm in frontal collisionsthat are not severe enough to activate thesupplemental air bag

*[SR11300(ALL)01/95] ❑ reduce the risk of being thrown from yourvehicle

%*[SR11400(ALL)01/95] The Importance of Being Properly Seated

*[SR11500(ALL)05/95] In a collision, the air bag must inflate extremelyfast to help provide additional protection foryou. In order to do this, the air bag must inflatewith considerable force. If you are not seated ina normal riding position with your back againstthe seatback, the air bag may not protect youproperly and could possibly hurt you as itinflates.


28


If a passenger is not properly seated andrestrained, an inflating air bag could causeserious injury.


Do not place objects or mount equipmenton or near the air bag cover on thesteering wheel or in front seat areas thatmay come in contact with a deploying airbag. Failure to follow this instruction mayincrease the risk of personal injury in theevent of a collision.

*[SR11650(ALL)07/95] For further information about the propermounting of equipment in the front seat of thisvehicle, please refer to Ford’s brochure entitledSome Important Information About Air BagSupplemental Restraint System which can beobtained by calling Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356.Ask for brochure FPS-8602.

*[SR11660(ALL)08/95] For additional important safety information onthe proper use of seat belts, child seats, andinfant seats, please read the other sections of thischapter of the Owner Guide, especially sectionsentitled Safety Belts for Children and Safety Seatsfor Children.

%*[SR11800(ALL)01/95] How the Air Bag Supplemental RestraintSystem Operates

[SR11850(ALL)05/95] The Air Bag Supplemental Restraint Systemconsists of the driver air bag, impact sensor, asystem diagnostic module, a readiness light andtone, and the electrical wiring which connectsthe components.


29

[SR12000(ALL)05/94]

half page art:0020842-C

The location of the air bag and warning label

*[SR12010(ALL)07/95] If a collision occurs, the sensors sense theseverity of the impact and activate the air bags ifnecessary. The air bag system is designed todeploy in frontal and front-angled collisionsmore severe than hitting a parked vehicle (ofsimilar size and weight) head-on at about28 mph (45 km/h). Because the system sensesthe crash severity rather than vehicle speed,some frontal collisions at speeds above 28 mph(45 km/h) will not inflate the air bag.

*[SR12020(ALL)07/95] When the sensors activate the system, the airbags inflate rapidly, filling with non-toxicnitrogen gas in a fraction of a second.Immediately after inflation, the air bags deflateby releasing the nitrogen gas through vent holes.The whole process takes place in a matter ofseconds.


30


Air bag system components get hot afterinflation. Do not touch them afterinflation.

*[SR12040(ALL)06/95]

half page art:0011063-A

Inflated driver-side air bag


If the air bag is inflated, THE AIR BAGWILL NOT FUNCTION AGAIN ANDMUST BE REPLACED IMMEDIATELY. Ifthe air bag is not replaced, the unrepairedarea will increase the risk of injury in acollision.


31

*[SR12070(ALL)07/95] To ensure that the air bag system will operate asintended in a crash, the system is equipped witha diagnostic module, which controls a readinesslamp and a warning tone. The diagnosticmodule monitors its own circuits, the air bagelectrical system, the air bag readiness light, theair bag power, and the air bag inflators.

%*[SR12200(ALL)05/95] The air bag system uses a readiness light on theinstrument cluster and a tone to indicate thecondition of the system. When you turn theignition key to the ON position, this light willilluminate for approximately six (6) seconds andthen turn off. This indicates that the system isoperating normally. NOTE: Maintenance of theair bag system is not required.

%*[SR12300(ALL)06/95] A problem with the system is indicated by oneor more of the following:

*[SR12310(ALL)06/95] ❑ the readiness light will either flash or stay lit,

*[SR12320(ALL)06/95] ❑or it will not light immediately after ignitionis turned on,

*[SR12330(ALL)06/95] ❑or a group of five beeps will be heard. Thetone pattern will repeat periodically until theproblem and light are repaired.

*[SR12360(ALL)08/95] If any of these things happen, have the air bagsystem serviced at your Ford or Lincoln-Mercurydealer immediately. Unless serviced, the air bagSupplemental Restraint System may not functionproperly in the event of a collision.


Do not attempt to service, repair, ormodify the Air Bag SupplementalRestraint System or its fuses. See yourFord or Lincoln-Mercury dealer.


32

%*[SR12650(ALL)05/95] Disposal of air bags or air bag equippedvehicles

*[SR12675(ALL)06/95] For disposal of air bags or air bag equippedvehicles, see your local Ford or Lincoln-Mercurydealer. Air bags MUST be disposed of byqualified personnel.

%*[SR14300(ALL)05/95] Safety Restraints for Children

*[SR14400(ALL)02/95] In the U.S. and Canada, you are required by lawto use safety restraints for children. If smallchildren ride in your vehicle — this generallyincludes children who are four years old oryounger and who weigh 40 pounds (18 kg) orless — you must put them in safety seats thatare made specially for children. Safety beltsalone do not provide maximum protection forthese children. Check your local and state lawsfor specific requirements.


Never let a passenger hold a child on hisor her lap while the vehicle is moving.The passenger cannot protect the childfrom injury in a collision.


To prevent the risk of injury, make surechildren sit where they can be properlyrestrained.


33

[SR14625(ALL)08/95] RWARNING

It is extremely dangerous to ride in acargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.In a collision, people riding in these areasare more likely to be seriously injured orkilled.


Do not allow people to ride in any area ofyour vehicle that is not equipped withseats and safety belts.


Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in aseat and using a safety belt properly.

*[SR14650(ALL)06/95] When possible, put children in the rear seat ofyour vehicle. Accident statistics suggest thatchildren are safer when properly restrained inthe rear seating positions than in the frontseating positions.


Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’sinstructions included with the safety seatyou put in your vehicle. If you do notinstall and use the safety seat properly,the child may be injured in a sudden stopor collision.


Safety belts and seats can become hot in avehicle that has been closed up in sunnyweather; they could burn a small child.Check seat covers and buckles before youplace a child anywhere near them.


34


Never leave a child unattended in yourvehicle.

%*[SR15900(ALL)01/95] Safety Seats for Children

*[SR16000(ALL)05/95] Use a safety seat that is recommended for thesize and weight of the child. Always follow thesafety seat manufacturer’s instructions wheninstalling and using the safety seat.

[SR16005(ALL)08/95] Most child safety seats can be used in thisvehicle only in vehicle seating positions withlap/shoulder belts. Any booster-type seat thatplaces the vehicle’s lap belt or shoulder beltaround a shield above and ahead of the child’ships should not be used in this vehicle. Thistype of safety seat could cause injury by tippingover the front edge of the vehicle seat during acollision.


The following instructions MUST BEFOLLOWED to reduce risk of injury froma safety seat tipping too far forward in asevere crash.

[SR16012(ALL)08/95] Install forward-facing child safety seats only invehicle seating positions equipped withlap/shoulder belts. Forward-facing convertiblesafety seats can be used in the center of thethree-passenger second row bench seat only if atop tether strap is used. Ford recommendsplacing forward-facing safety seats in the secondrow and using safety seats with top tether strapsfor added protection.

[SR16015(ALL)08/95] For more information on top tether straps seeAttaching Safety Seats With Tether Straps in thischapter.


35

*[SR16025(ALL)08/95] When installing a child safety seat, be sure touse the correct safety belt buckle for that seatingposition, and make sure the tongue is securelyfastened in the buckle. For a shoulder/lap beltcombination with a sliding tongue, make surethe retractor is in the automatic locking mode.

*[SR16090(ALL)07/95] All child restraint systems are designed to besecured in vehicle seats by lap belts or by thelap portion of a lap-shoulder belt.


If you do not properly secure the safetyseat, the child occupying the seat may beinjured during a collision or sudden stop.An unsecured safety seat could also injureother passengers.




36


Always keep the buckle release buttonpointing upward and away from the childseat, with the tongue between the childseat and the release button as shown inthe following illustration.

[SR16280(ALL)05/95]


Safety belt buckle placement for child seats


37

[SR25601(ALL)08/95] Installing Child Safety Seats inthe Front Seat and Rear OutboardSeating Positions

[SR25650(ALL)08/95] Your vehicle is equipped with a dual lockingmode retractor on the shoulder belt portion ofthe combination lap/shoulder safety belt for theright front seat passenger and rear outboardpassengers.

[SR25701(ALL)03/95] If you choose to install a child safety seat orinfant carrier in these seating positions:

[SR25750(ALL)08/95] 1. Position the child seat on the seat of thevehicle. In the front seat, adjust the vehicleseat as far rearward as possible.

[SR25801(ALL)08/95] 2. Pull down on the shoulder belt, then graspthe shoulder belt and lap belt together. SeeFigure 1.

[SR25900(ALL)08/95]



38

*[SR26000(ALL)08/95] 3. While holding the shoulder and lap beltportions together, route the tongue throughthe child seat according to the child seatmanufacturer’s instructions. See Figure 2.Be sure the belt webbing is not twisted, andinsert the tongue into the buckle. SeeFigure 3.

[SR26100(ALL)08/95]


Routing the lap/shoulder belt


39

[SR26201(ALL)08/95]

half page art:0011240-B

Buckling the belt


40

*[SR26301(ALL)08/95] 4. Grasp the shoulder portion of the belt andpull downward until all of the belt isextracted and a click is heard. At this time,the retractor is in the automatic lockingmode (child seat restraint mode). SeeFigure 4.

[SR26401(ALL)08/95]


Setting the retractor to automatic locking mode


41

[SR26500(ALL)08/95] 5. Allow the belt to retract. Pull up on theshoulder webbing. A clicking sound will beheard as the belt retracts. This indicates theretractor is in the automatic locking mode.Push down on the child seat while you pullup on the belt to remove any slack in thebelt. See Figures 5 and 6.

[SR26601(ALL)08/95]



42

[SR26700(ALL)08/95]



43

[SR26801(ALL)08/95] 6. Before placing the child in the child seat,forcibly tilt the seat from side to side, andtug it forward to make sure that the seat issecurely held in place. See Figure 7.

[SR26900(ALL)08/95]


Checking that the seat is secure

[SR27000(ALL)08/95] 7. Double check that the retractor is in theautomatic locking mode. Try to pull morebelt out of the retractor. If you cannot, thebelt is in the automatic locking mode. SeeFigure 8.


44

[SR27100(ALL)08/95]


Checking the retractor

*[SR27201(ALL)05/95] 8. Check to make sure that the child seat isproperly secured prior to each use. If theretractor is not locked, repeat steps 4through 7.

*[SR27205(ALL)05/95] NOTE: To remove the retractor from automaticlock mode, allow seat belt to retractfully to its stowed position and theretractor will automatically switch backto the vehicle sensitive locking modefor normal adult usage.




45

[SR27300(ALL)05/95] Installing Child Safety Seats atthe Rear Center Seating Positionwith Locking Adjustable Lap Belt

[SR27350(ALL)08/95] DO NOT install a forward-facing child safetyseat in the third row center seating position.Forward-facing seats must be installed with alap/shoulder belt, or a lap belt and top tetherstrap.

[SR27400(ALL)06/95] 1. Lengthen the lap belt. To lengthen the belt,hold the tongue so that its bottom isperpendicular to the direction of webbingwhile sliding the tongue toward the looseend of webbing.

*[SR27450(ALL)01/95] 2. Place the child safety seat in the centerseating position.

*[SR27500(ALL)01/95] 3. Route the tongue and webbing through thechild seat according to the child seatmanufacturer’s instructions.

*[SR27550(ALL)03/95] 4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper bucklefor the center seating position until you heara snap and feel it latch. Make sure thetongue is securely fastened to the buckle bypulling on tongue.

*[SR27600(ALL)01/95] 5. Push down on the child seat while pullingon the loose end of the lap belt webbing totighten the belt.

*[SR27650(ALL)04/95] 6. Before placing the child into child seat,forcibly tilt the child seat from side-to-sideand in forward directions to ensure that theseat is held securely in place. If the childseat moves excessively, repeat steps 5through 6, or properly install the child seatin a different seating position.


46

%*[SR27700(ALL)06/95] Attaching Safety Seats With Tether Straps

*[SR27750(ALL)06/95] Some manufacturers make safety seats thatinclude a tether strap that goes over the back ofthe vehicle seat and attaches to an anchoringpoint. Other manufacturers offer the tether strapas an accessory. Contact the manufacturer ofyour child safety seat for information aboutordering a tether strap.

*[SR27760(ALL)06/95] You can attach a tether strap anchor bracket tothe rear floor by using a tether anchor kit(613D74), available at no charge from any Forddealership.

*[SR27770(ALL)08/95] Read and carefully follow the instructionsprovided with the kit for installation of the childtether strap anchor.

[SR27790(ALL)08/95] Ford recommends placement of tethered safetyseats in a second row seating position with thetether strap installed to the tether anchoringpoint as shown in the instructions provided withthe child tether strap anchor kit.


Only use the tether attachment holelocations shown in the illustrations. Thetether anchor may not perform properly ifthe wrong mounting location is used.

[SR27810(ALL)05/95] Four (4) tether strap anchor locations have beenprovided in your vehicle. If you want yourchild’s safety seat located in the front, right handpassenger seat, you must use the tether strapanchor attachment location under the secondrow bench seat or right hand bucket seat. Forsecond row seating positions, you must use oneof the three (3) tether strap anchor locationsunder the third row bench seat.


47

[SR27812(ALL)08/95] Until a floor anchor is installed, follow thesesteps to install a tethered child safety seat in thefront seat:

[SR27814(ALL)08/95] 1. Buckle the lap/shoulder belt in the seatdirectly behind the front passenger seat.

[SR27816(ALL)08/95] 2. Pull all the stored belt out of the rear seatbelt retractor to switch the retractor toautomatic locking mode.

*[SR27818(ALL)07/95] 3. Let the retractor wind up the slack from thelap/shoulder belt.

[SR27820(ALL)08/95] 4. Install the child safety seat in the right frontseat. Refer to the previous section onInstalling Child Safety Seats. Hook the tetherstrap around the webbing near the center ofthe shoulder portion of the lap/shoulderbelt.

*[SR27822(ALL)07/95] 5. Tighten the tether strap.

[SR27824(ALL)08/95] Until floor-mounted tether anchors are installed,tether straps of child safety seats in the secondrow may be anchored to lap/shoulder belts forthe third row, following the five steps above, orto the tongue of the third row lap belt.


Failure to follow these precautions couldincrease the chance of injury in anaccident.


If the anchor bolt(s) is ever removed, thehole(s) in the floor must be sealed toprevent the possibility of exhaust fumesentering the passenger compartment.


48

%*[SR30000(ALL)05/95] Built-In Child Seat (If equipped)

[SR30010(ALL)05/95] The second row bench seat may include anoptional built-in child safety seat. This childrestraint is to be used only by children who areat least one year old, weigh between 20 and 60pounds (9 and 27 kilograms) and whoseshoulders (top) are below the shoulder harnessslots in the seatbacks with the headrest in thefull up position.

*[SR30020(ALL)05/95] If your child is less than one year old or weighsless than 9 kilograms (20 pounds), always use arear facing infant or convertible seat because achild of that size is not sufficiently developed towithstand crash forces in a front facing position.Follow the specific manufacturer’s instructionsfor weight and height restrictions.

*[SR30030(ALL)05/95] Children must be properly buckled before ridingin the vehicle. It is the law in every state andprovince. This child seat conforms to allFederal/Canadian motor vehicle safetystandards.

*[SR30070(ALL)05/95] Always adjust the lap and shoulder harness beltsprovided with this child seat snugly aroundyour child.


49


Never leave a child unattended in yourvehicle.


Safety belts and seats can become hot in avehicle that has been closed up in sunnyweather; they could burn a small child.Check seat covers and buckles before youplace a child anywhere near them.


Failure to follow all of the instructions onthe use of this child restraint system canresult in your child striking the vehicle’sinterior during a sudden stop or crash.

*[SR30110(ALL)05/95] How to use the Built-In Child Seat

*[SR30120(ALL)05/95] Read the following procedures and all of thelabels on the Built-In Child Seat before using theseat.


Never use the Built-In Child Seat as abooster cushion with the adult safetybelts. A child using the adult belts couldslide forward and out from under thesafety belts.

[SR30140(ALL)06/95] 1. Pull the headrest release strap and grasp theheadrest as shown in Figure 1. Then releasethe strap and rotate the headrest fully untilthe latch “clicks” in the full up position.


50

[SR30155(ALL)08/95]


Figure 1

*[SR30160(ALL)05/95] 2. Continue to unfold the child seat until itrests on the seat as shown in Figure 2.

[SR30170(ALL)06/95]


Figure 2


51

[SR30190(ALL)05/95] 3. Read the information and warnings on thechild seat. Check the child’s size, weight andage to be sure the child is not too small ortoo large for the child seat. Refer to Figure 3.

[SR30195(ALL)06/95]

two third page art:0095050-A

Figure 3

[SR30200(ALL)06/95] 4. Pull up on the two black looped straps atthe upper corners of the child seat to unsnapthe cushion protector flap.

[SR30210(ALL)05/95] 5. Lower the seat cushion.

[SR30230(ALL)05/95] 6. Pull the lap and shoulder belts cinch releasestrap while pulling the shoulder belts fullyout. Refer to Figures 4 and 5.


52

[SR30240(ALL)05/95]


Figure 4

[SR30250(ALL)05/95]


Figure 5

*[SR30260(ALL)05/95] 6. If connected, squeeze the top and the bottomof the right half of the chest clip and pull toseparate both halves.


53

[SR30270(ALL)06/95] 7. Place the child on the child seat and positionthe shoulder belts over each shoulder. Referto Figure 6.

[SR30280(ALL)06/95]


Figure 6: Shoulder safety belt placement on the child

[SR30300(ALL)08/95] 8. Insert either the left or right safety belttongue into the single opening of the crotchbelt buckle as shown in Figure 7. (It doesnot matter which tongue is inserted first.)Then insert the other tongue.


If both tongues do not latch in the buckle,do not use the child seat. See your dealerfor repairs.

[SR30320(ALL)06/95]


Figure 7: Fastening the crotch safety belt buckle


54

[SR30330(ALL)08/95] 9. Fasten both halves of the chest clip belowthe child’s shoulders and adjust it tocomfortably hold the shoulder belts in placeon the child’s chest. The purpose of this clipis to position the shoulder belts correctly onthe child’s shoulders. The clip can be easilypulled apart, and is designed to pull apartduring a collision. The clip helps keep theshoulder belts on the shoulders of a sleepingor squirming child. Refer to Figure 8.

[SR30340(ALL)05/95]


Figure 8: Securing the chest clip


55

[SR30350(ALL)08/95] 10. Pull the shoulder belts out to ensure that thecrotch safety belt buckle is securely fastened.Adjust the lap and shoulder belts by pullingfirmly on the adjustment belt. Refer toFigure 9.

[SR30360(ALL)05/95]


Figure 9: Checking for securely latched buckle and lockedretractor

[SR30370(ALL)08/95] 11. If the shoulder belts are pulled too tight,pull on the lap and shoulder belts cinchrelease strap to loosen the shoulder belts onthe child’s shoulders. Refer to Figure 4. Thenretighten the lap and shoulder adjustmentbelt per Step 10 above.


56

*[SR30380(ALL)05/95] To remove the child from the built-in childseat:

[SR30390(ALL)06/95] 1. Squeeze the tabs on the top and bottom ofthe chest clip and pull the halves apart toopen the chest clip. Refer to Figure 8.

*[SR30400(ALL)06/95] 2. Press the release button on the crotch safetybelt buckle.

[SR30410(ALL)05/95] 3. Slide the shoulder belts off the child’sshoulders and remove the child. Refer toFigure 6.

*[SR30420(ALL)06/95] To stow the built-in child seat:

[SR30430(ALL)05/95] 1. Return the child seat cushion to the uprightposition and lift the protector flap towardthe headrest.

[SR30440(ALL)05/95] 2. Fasten the snaps securely.

[SR30450(ALL)05/95] 3. Pull on the headrest release strap and rotatethe headrest downward until it latchesagainst the child seat cushion.


Always fasten the protector flap snapswhen stowing your child seats to preventthe child seat cushion from rotatingforward in a collision.

[SR30470(ALL)05/95] The seat can now be used by an adult.


57

*[SR30480(ALL)05/95] Inspection after a collision


All built-in child restraints, includingseats, buckles, retractors, seat latches,interlocks, and attaching hardware shouldbe inspected by a qualified dealertechnician after any collision.

*[SR30495(ALL)08/95] If the child seat was in use during a collision,Ford recommends replacing it. However, if thecollision was minor and a qualified technicianfinds that the child restraints do not showdamage and continue to operate properly, theydo not need to be replaced. If there is anybending of the vehicle seatback or seat structure,it should also be replaced. Built-in child seatsnot in use during a collision should also beinspected and replaced if either damage orimproper operation is noted.

*[SR30500(ALL)05/95] Built-in child seat maintenance

*[SR30510(ALL)05/95] Regularly inspect the lap and shoulder beltssystem of your child seat. See your Ford dealerif the shoulder belt webbing is frayed, or if thebuckle and tongue are damaged and/or do notfunction properly.

%*[SR30520(ALL)05/95] Cleaning

*[SR30530(ALL)08/95] Your Built-In Child Seat may be cleaned withmild soap and water. Do not use householdcleaners as they may weaken the webbing ordamage the plastic parts. For your convenience,the liner can be removed, machine-washed, andair-dried.


58

%*[SR30540(ALL)07/95] Safety Belts for Children

*[SR30550(ALL)07/95] Children who are too large for child safety seatsshould always wear safety belts. (See instructionswith your child seat, or contact its manufacturer,to determine maximum size of child that willsafely fit in the seat.)


If safety belts are not properly worn andadjusted as described, the risk of seriousinjury to the child in a collision will bemuch greater.

*[SR30570(ALL)07/95] If the shoulder belt portion of one of the lap andshoulder belts can be positioned so that it doesnot cross or rest in front of the child’s face orneck, the child should wear the lap and shoulderbelt. Moving the child closer to the center of thevehicle may help provide a good shoulder beltfit.

*[SR30580(ALL)07/95] To improve the fit of lap and shoulder belts onchildren who have outgrown child safety seats,Ford recommends use of a belt-positioningbooster seat that is labelled as conforming to allFederal motor vehicle safety standards.Belt-positioning booster seats raise the child andprovide a shorter, firmer seating cushion thatencourages safer seating posture and better fit oflap and shoulder belts on the child. Abelt-positioning booster should be used if theshoulder belt rests in front of the child’s face orneck, or if the lap belt does not fit snugly onboth thighs, or if the thighs are too short to letthe child sit all the way back on the seat cushionwhen the lower legs hang over the edge of theseat cushion. You may wish to discuss thespecific needs of your child with yourpediatrician.


59


Do not use a belt-positioning booster witha lap-only belt.

*[SR30600(ALL)07/95] Lap belts and the lap belt portion of lap andshoulder belts should always be worn snuglyand below the hips, touching the child’s thighs.




61

Starting Your Aerostar

*[ST01700(ALL)03/95] Ignition%*[ST01800(ALL)01/95] Understanding the Positions of the Ignition

*[ST02000(ALL)05/90]


The positions of the key in the ignition lock cylinder.

%*[ST02100(ALL)07/95] ACCESSORY allows some of your vehicle’selectrical accessories such as the radio and thewindshield wipers to operate while the engine isnot running.

*[ST02500(ALL)08/95] LOCK locks the steering wheel and gearshiftlever.

*[ST02700(ALL)01/95] LOCK is the only position that allows you toremove the key. The LOCK feature helps toprotect your vehicle from theft.

*[ST02800(ALL)05/95] If your key is stuck in the LOCK position andwill not turn, move your steering wheel left orright until the key turns freely.

*[ST02850(ALL)03/95] OFF allows you to shut off the engine and allaccessories without locking the steering wheel orthe automatic transmission gearshift lever.

File:04cpsta.exUpdate:Tue Aug 29 17:35:31 1995

62

*[ST02900(ALL)05/95] ON allows you to test your vehicle’s warninglights (except the brake system warning light) tomake sure they work before you start theengine. The key returns to the ON position oncethe engine is started and remains in this positionwhile the engine runs.

*[ST02950(ALL)03/95] START cranks the engine. Release the key oncethe engine starts so that you do not damage thestarter. The key should return to ON when yourelease it. The START position also allows youto test the brake warning light.

%*[ST03000(ALL)02/95] Removing the Key From the Ignition

*[ST03400(ALL)06/95] 1. Put the gearshift in P (Park).

*[ST03500(ALL)03/91] 2. Set the parking brake fully before removingyour foot from the service brake. (This willavoid “binding” or “loading” the park gearif you park on a grade.)

*[ST03600(ALL)03/95] 3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.

*[ST03700(ALL)03/95] 4. Remove the key.


63

*[ST04625(ALL)06/95] RWARNING

Always set the parking brake fully andmake sure the gearshift is securely latchedin P (Park).


Do not leave children, unreliable adults,or pets alone in your vehicle. They couldaccidentally injure themselves or othersthrough inadvertent operation of thevehicle. Further, on hot, sunny days,temperatures in a closed vehicle couldquickly become high enough to causesevere and possibly fatal injuries topeople as well as animals.

%*[ST04775(ALL)03/91] Ignition Key Buzzer or Chime

*[ST04780(ALL)03/91] The buzzer or chime will sound if you open thedriver’s door while the key is in the ignition.Never leave your vehicle unattended with thekey in the ignition.

%*[ST04800(ALL)03/95] Fuel-Injected Engines

*[ST04900(ALL)03/95] When starting a fuel-injected engine, the mostimportant thing to remember is to avoidpressing down on the accelerator before orduring starting. Only use the accelerator whenyou have problems getting your vehicle started.See Starting Your Engine in this chapter fordetails about when to use the accelerator whileyou start your vehicle.


64

*[ST05150(ALL)03/95] Starting Your Vehicle%*[ST05200(ALL)05/94] Preparing to Start Your Vehicle


Do not start your vehicle in a closedgarage or other enclosed area. Never sit ina stopped vehicle for more than a shortperiod of time with the engine running.Exhaust fumes are toxic. See GuardingAgainst Exhaust Fumes in this chapter formore instructions.

*[ST05400(ALL)01/95] Before you start your vehicle, do the following:

*[ST05500(ALL)08/95] 1. Make sure all occupants in the vehiclebuckle their safety belts. See Safety Restraintsin the Index for more details.

*[ST05600(ALL)03/95] 2. Make sure the headlamps and otheraccessories are turned off when starting.

*[ST05750(ALL)03/95] 3. Make sure that the gearshift is in P (Park)and the parking brake is set before you turnthe key.

*[ST06015(ALL)03/95] Before you start your vehicle, you should testthe warning lights on the instrument panel tomake sure that they work. Refer to the WarningLights and Gauges chapter.

%*[ST06200(ALL)02/95] Starting Your Engine

*[ST06300(ALL)06/95] To start your engine:

*[ST06400(ALL)05/95] 1. Follow the steps under Preparing to StartYour Vehicle at the beginning of this section.

*[ST06425(ALL)03/95] 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON position.

*[ST06451(ALL)06/95] 3. DO NOT depress the accelerator pedal whenstarting your engine. DO NOT use theaccelerator while the vehicle is parked.


65

*[ST06475(ALL)02/95] 4. Turn the key to the START position(cranking) until the engine starts. Allow thekey to return to the ON position after theengine has started.

*[ST06501(ALL)02/95] If you have difficulty in turning the key,rotate the steering wheel slightly because itmay be binding.

%*[ST06505(ALL)04/95] For a cold engine:

*[ST06510(ALL)06/95] ❑At temperatures 10˚F (-12˚C) and below: Ifthe engine does not start in fifteen (15)seconds on the first try, turn the key to OFF,wait approximately ten (10) seconds so youdo not flood the engine, then try again.

*[ST06515(ALL)04/95] ❑At temperatures above 10˚F (-12˚C): If theengine does not start in five (5) seconds onthe first try, turn the key to OFF, waitapproximately ten (10) seconds so you do notflood the engine, then try again.

%*[ST06530(ALL)05/95] For a warm engine:

*[ST06551(ALL)04/95] ❑Do not hold the key in the START positionfor more than five (5) seconds at a time. Ifthe engine does not start within five (5)seconds on the first try, turn the key to theOFF position. Wait a few seconds after thestarter stops, then try again.

*[ST06575(ALL)08/95] Whenever you start your vehicle, release the keyas soon as the engine starts. Excessive crankingcould damage the starter.

*[ST06601(ALL)08/95] After you start the engine let it idle for a fewseconds before driving away. Keep your foot onthe brake pedal and put the gearshift lever ingear. Release the parking brake. Slowly releasethe brake pedal and drive away in the normalmanner.


66

%*[ST06625(ALL)01/95] NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with abrake-shift interlock feature. Thisfeature prevents you from shiftingfrom P (Park) unless you have thebrake pedal depressed. (The ignitionmust be in the ON position.) If youcannot shift from P (Park) with thebrake pedal depressed:

*[ST06627(ALL)01/95] 1. Apply the parking brake.

*[ST06629(ALL)01/95] 2. Remove the key.

*[ST06631(ALL)08/95] 3. Insert the key and rotate it one positionclockwise (ignition in the OFF position).

*[ST06633(ALL)08/95] 4. Apply the brake pedal and shift to N(Neutral). (If the vehicle is shifted back to P[Park], you must repeat the previous steps.)

*[ST06635(ALL)01/95] 5. Start the vehicle.

*[ST06637(ALL)07/95] If you need to shift out of P (Park) by using thealternate procedure described above, it ispossible that a fuse has blown and that yourbrakelamps may also not be functional. Pleaserefer to the chapter titled Servicing Your Aerostarin this Owner Guide for instructions on checkingand replacing fuses.


DO NOT DRIVE YOUR VEHICLE UNTILYOU VERIFY THAT THE BRAKELAMPSARE WORKING.


67

*[ST06800(ALL)06/95] If the engine still does not start after twoattempts:

*[ST06825(ALL)04/95] 1. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position.

*[ST06851(ALL)04/95] 2. Press the accelerator all the way to the floorand hold it.

*[ST06876(ALL)04/95] 3. Turn the ignition key to the START position.

*[ST06900(ALL)04/95] 4. Release the ignition key when the enginestarts.

*[ST06925(ALL)04/95] 5. Release the accelerator gradually as theengine speeds up. Then drive away in thenormal manner.

*[ST06951(ALL)04/95] If the engine still does not start, the fuel pumpshut-off switch may have been triggered. Fordirections on how to reset the switch see FuelPump Shut-Off Switch later in this chapter.

%*[ST07300(ALL)05/95] A computer system controls the engine’s idlespeed. When you start your vehicle, the engine’sidle speed normally runs high. These fasterengine speeds will make your vehicle moveslightly faster than its normal idle speed. Itshould, however, slow down after a short time.If it does not, have the idle speed checked.

*[ST07390(ALL)07/95] If the engine idle speed does not slow downautomatically, do not allow your vehicle to idlefor more than 10 minutes. Have the vehiclechecked.


Extended idling at high engine speeds canproduce very high temperatures in theengine and exhaust system, creating therisk of fire or other damage.


68


Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle indry grass or other dry ground cover. Theemission system heats up the enginecompartment and exhaust system, whichcan start a fire.

*[ST07500(ALL)03/95] If you consistently start your vehicle in subzerotemperatures, use an engine block heater (ifyour vehicle has this option).

%*[ST07600(ALL)06/95] Engine Block Heater (If equipped)

*[ST07700(ALL)03/95] Engine block heaters are strongly recommendedif you live in a region where temperatures reach-10˚F (-23˚C) or below. An engine block heaterwarms the engine coolant, which improvesstarting, warms up the engine faster, and allowsthe heater-defrost system to respond quickly.


To prevent electrical shock, do not useyour heater with ungrounded electricalsystems or two-pronged (cheater) adapters.

*[ST08100(ALL)03/95] For best results, plug the heater in at least threehours before you start your vehicle. Using theheater for longer than three hours will notdamage the engine, so you can plug it in atnight to start your vehicle the followingmorning.

*[ST08150(ALL)12/91] NOTE: Be sure to disconnect the engine blockheater before driving your vehicle.


69

%*[ST08160(ALL)03/95] If the Engine Cranks but DoesNot Start or Does Not Start Aftera Collision

*[ST08170(ALL)08/95] Fuel Pump Shut-Off Switch

*[ST08180(ALL)07/95] If the engine cranks but does not start or doesnot start after a collision, the fuel pump shut-offswitch may have been triggered. The shut-offswitch is a device intended to stop the fuelpump when your vehicle has been involved in asubstantial jolt.

*[ST08190(ALL)03/95] Once the shut-off switch is triggered, you mustreset the switch by hand before you can startyour vehicle.

[ST08200(ALL)07/95]


Fuel pump shut-off switch location


If you see or smell fuel, do not reset theswitch or try to start your vehicle. Haveall the passengers get out of the vehicleand call the local fire department or atowing service.


70

*[ST08250(ALL)03/95] If your engine cranks but does not start after acollision or substantial jolt:

*[ST08275(ALL)04/95] 1. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position.

*[ST08300(ALL)03/95] 2. Check under the vehicle for leaking fuel.

*[ST08325(ALL)03/95] 3. If you do not see or smell fuel, push the redreset button down. If the button is alreadyset, you may have a different mechanicalproblem.

*[ST08350(ALL)03/95] 4. Turn the ignition key to the ON position fora few seconds, then turn it to the OFFposition.

*[ST08375(ALL)03/95] 5. Check under the vehicle again for leakingfuel. If you see or smell fuel, do not startyour vehicle again. If you do not see orsmell fuel, you can try to start your vehicleagain.

*[ST08400(ALL)03/95] 6. Check all vehicle warning lights beforedriving the vehicle.

*[ST08425(ALL)03/95]

quarter page art:0020107-A

Reset button for fuel pump shut-off switch


71


Do not start your vehicle in a closedgarage or other enclosed area. Never sit ina stopped vehicle for more than a shortperiod of time with the engine running.Exhaust fumes are toxic. See GuardingAgainst Exhaust Fumes in this chapter formore instructions.

%*[ST09300(ALL)05/95] Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes

*[ST09400(ALL)02/95] Carbon monoxide, although colorless andodorless, is present in exhaust fumes. Takeprecautions to avoid its dangerous effects.


If you smell exhaust fumes inside yourvehicle, have your dealer inspect yourvehicle immediately. Do not drive if yousmell exhaust fumes.

*[ST09700(ALL)03/95] If your vehicle has rear windows and doors thatwere installed as part of a van conversion, closethem while it is running. This prevents exhaustfumes from being drawn into the passengercompartment.


72

*[ST09900(ALL)01/95] Have the exhaust and body ventilation systemschecked whenever:

*[ST10000(ALL)02/95] ❑your vehicle is raised for service

*[ST10100(ALL)02/95] ❑ the sound of the exhaust system changes

*[ST10200(ALL)01/95] ❑your vehicle has been damaged in a collision

*[ST10300(ALL)01/95] Improve your ventilation by keeping all air inletvents clear of snow, leaves, and other debris.

*[ST10400(ALL)08/95] If the engine is idling while you are stopped inan open area for long periods of time, open thewindows at least one inch (2.5 cm). Also, adjustthe heating or air conditioning system to bringin outside air.

*[ST10600(ALL)03/91] ❑HEATING — Set fan speed at MEDIUM orHIGH, the function selector knob on VENT,FLOOR, MIX, or the DEFROST symbol andthe temperature control knob on any desiredposition.

[ST10800(ALL)07/95] ❑AIR CONDITIONING — Set the fan speedknob at MEDIUM or HIGH, the functionselector knob on NORM A/C or MAX A/Cand the temperature control knob on anydesired position.


73

Warning Lights andGauges

%*[LG00400(ALL)01/95] The instrument panel (dashboard) on yourvehicle is divided into several different sections.The illustrations on the following pages showthe major parts of the instrument panel that aredescribed in this chapter. Some items shownmay not be on all vehicles.

*[LG00525(ALL)12/91] In your vehicle, the warning lights and gaugesare grouped together on the instrument panel.We call this grouping a cluster. Your vehicle hasa mechanical cluster.

File:05cplga.exUpdate:Tue Aug 29 17:36:50 1995

74

[LG01800(ALL)07/95]

fullpageart:0095026-B

Aerostar

mech

anical

cluster

File:05cplga.exU

pdate:T

ue Aug 29 17:36:50 1995

75

%*[LG03000(ALL)06/94] The Mechanical Cluster

*[LG03100(ALL)06/93] The following warning lights and gauges are onthe mechanical cluster. All of the warning lightsand gauges alert you to possible problems withyour vehicle. Some of the lights listed areoptional. The following sections detail what eachof these indicators means.

%*[LG03200(ALL)06/95] Brake System Warning Light

*[LG03300(ALL)03/95] The warning light for the brakes can show twothings — that the parking brake is not fullyreleased, or that the brake fluid level is low inthe master cylinder reservoir. If the fluid level islow, the brake system should be checked byyour dealer or a qualified service technician.

*[LG03400(ALL)05/94] This light comes on when you turn the ignitionkey to START to verify that the indicator bulb isworking. If the light stays on or comes on afteryou have released the parking brake fully, havethe hydraulic brake system serviced.

*[LG03500(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

The BRAKE light indicates that the brakesmay not be working properly. Have thebrakes checked immediately.

[LG03600(ALL)07/95]


Brake warning light symbol


76

[LG03700(ALL)07/95] Rear Anti-Lock (ABS) Brake Warning Light

[LG03900(ALL)05/95] To check the rear ABS brake warning light turnthe ignition key to the ON position. The rearABS brake warning light should glowmomentarily.

*[LG03950(ALL)06/94] NOTE: If it does not glow momentarily, haveyour vehicle’s electrical system checkedimmediately.

[LG03975(ALL)07/95] NOTE: If the rear ABS brake warning lightbegins to flash in a repeating flashsequence, check the rear anti-lockbrake system continuous power fuseand brake lights for proper operation.

[LG04000(ALL)05/95]


Rear anti-lock warning light symbol

*[LG04100(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

If the anti-lock brake system warninglight remains on or comes on whiledriving, have the braking system checkedby a qualified service technician as soonas possible.

*[LG04110(ALL)07/95] NOTE: If a fault occurs in the anti-locksystem, and the brake warning light isnot lit, the anti-lock system is disabledbut normal brake function remainsoperational.


77

%*[LG04150(ALL)07/95] Safety Belt Warning Light and Chime

[LG04301(ALL)03/95] This warning light and chime remind you tofasten your safety belt. One of the following willtake place:

*[LG04325(ALL)03/95] ❑ If the safety belt is not buckled when the keyis turned to the ON position, the light comeson for 1 to 2 minutes and the chime soundsfor 4 to 8 seconds.

*[LG04351(ALL)02/95] ❑ If the safety belt is buckled while the light ison and the chime is sounding, both the lightand chime turn off.

*[LG04365(ALL)05/95] ❑ If the safety belt is buckled before theignition is turned to the ON position, neitherthe light nor the chime will come on.

*[LG04400(ALL)10/92]

one inch art:0020046-B

Safety belt warning light symbol

%*[LG04425(ALL)03/95] Door Ajar Light and Chime

[LG04450(ALL)03/95] This light turns on along with an audible chimeif one of the doors is not completely shut whenyou turn the ignition to the ON position.

[LG04475(ALL)05/95]


Door ajar light


78

%*[LG04500(ALL)03/95] Check Engine Warning Light

*[LG04550(ALL)05/95] The Powertrain On-Board Diagnostic II (OBD II)system consists of the hardware and softwarenecessary to monitor the operation of thepowertrain. The OBD II system is designed tocheck the function of the vehicle’s powertraincontrol system during normal operation. If anemission problem is detected, the Check EngineWarning Light (in the cluster) is turned on.

*[LG04575(ALL)05/95] Modification or additions to the vehicle maycause incorrect operation of the OBD II system.Additions such as burglar alarms, cellularphones, and CB radios must be carefullyinstalled. Do not install these devices by tappinginto or running wires close to powertrain controlsystem wires or components.

[LG04600(ALL)07/95] The light comes on briefly when you turn theignition key to the ON position, but it shouldturn off when the engine starts. If the light doesnot come on when you turn the ignition to ONor if it comes on and stays on when you aredriving, have your vehicle serviced as soon aspossible. This indicates a possible problem withone of the vehicle’s emission control systems.You do not need to have your vehicle towed in.

[LG04650(ALL)08/95] If the light turns on and off at one (1) secondintervals while you are driving the vehicle, itmeans that the engine is misfiring. If thiscondition persists, damage could occur to theengine or catalytic convertor. Have your vehicleserviced at the first opportunity. You do notneed to have your vehicle towed in.

[LG04700(ALL)08/95] If the light turns on and off on rare occasionswhile you are driving, it means that amalfunction occurred and the condition correcteditself.


79

[LG04750(ALL)08/95] An example of a condition which corrects itselfoccurs when an engine running out of fuelbegins to misfire. In this case, the Check EngineWarning Light may turn on and will then set aDiagnostic Trouble Code indicating that theengine was misfiring while the last of the fuelwas being consumed. After refueling, the CheckEngine Warning Light will turn off after thevehicle has completed three consecutive warmup cycles without a mifire condition occurring.A warm up cycle consists of engine start from acold condition (engine at ambient temperature)and running until the engine reaches normaloperating temperature.

[LG04825(ALL)07/95] On the fourth engine start up, the Check EngineWarning Light will turn off as soon as theengine begins to crank. It is not necessary tohave the engine serviced.

[LG04875(ALL)07/95] Under certain conditions, the Check EngineWarning Light may come on if the fuel cap isnot properly installed. If the Check EngineWarning Light comes on and you suspect thefuel cap is not properly installed, pull off theroad as soon as it is safely possible and turn offthe engine. Remove and replace the fuel cap,making sure it is properly seated.

[LG04900(ALL)07/95] After completing three consecutive warm-upcycles and on the fourth engine start-up, theCheck Engine Warning Light should turn off. Ifthe light does not go off after the fourth enginerestart, have your vehicle serviced by yourdealer or a qualified technician.


80

*[LG05300(ALL)05/95]


Check engine warning light symbol

[LG05525(ALL)03/94] Electronic 4-Wheel Drive Warning Light(If equipped)

[LG05550(ALL)03/95] The Electronic 4-Wheel Drive Warning Lightturns on when the Electronic 4-Wheel Drivesystem is not working properly. This light comeson briefly when you turn the ignition key to theON position, but should turn off when theengine starts. If the light does not come on whenyou turn the ignition to the ON position, or if itcomes on and stays on when you are driving,have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible.

[LG05560(ALL)03/94] The 4WD light will go off after a few secondsand stay off if all systems are operatingcorrectly. If a problem is detected, the 4WDwarning light will flash a certain number oftimes indicating the location of the problem. Theflashing will continue until the problem iscorrected. Each time the ignition key is turnedon the controller will detect the problem andflash the signal. The 4WD system remains safe tooperate and the vehicle should be returned forservice.

[LG05575(ALL)03/94]


Electronic 4-wheel drive warning light


81

%*[LG05900(ALL)01/95] Charging System Light

*[LG06000(ALL)03/95] This light indicates that your battery is not beingcharged and that you need to have the electricalsystem checked.

[LG06050(ALL)05/95]


Charging system light

*[LG06100(ALL)07/95] This light comes on every time you turn theignition to the ON or START position (engineoff). The light should go off when the enginestarts and the alternator begins to charge.

*[LG06300(ALL)01/95] If the light stays on or comes on when theengine is running, have the electrical systemchecked as soon as possible.

%*[LG06305(ALL)06/93] Supplemental Air Bag Readiness Light andTone Generator

*[LG06310(ALL)06/93] This light illuminates for six seconds when theignition is turned to the ON position. If the lightfails to illuminate, continues to flash, remains on,or if a series of five beeps is heard, have thesystem serviced as soon as possible.

*[LG06315(ALL)05/95]


Supplemental air bag readiness light


82

%*[LG06400(ALL)05/94] Battery Voltage Gauge (Voltmeter)

*[LG06601(ALL)05/94] This gauge shows you the battery voltage whenthe ignition key is in the ON position.

*[LG06700(ALL)11/89] If you are running electrical accessories (whenthe engine is off, or idling at a low speed), thepointer may move toward the lower end of thenormal band. If it stays outside the normal bandarea, have your vehicle’s electrical systemchecked as soon as it is safely possible.

*[LG06701(ALL)05/95] If the battery is operating under cold weatherconditions, the pointer may indicate in the upperrange of the NORMAL band while the battery ischarging. If you are running electrical accessorieswith the engine off or idling at a low speed, orthe battery is not fully charged, the pointer maymove toward the lower end of the NORMALband.

*[LG06750(ALL)05/94] If it stays outside the NORMAL band, have yourvehicle’s electrical system checked as soon as itis safely possible.

*[LG06900(ALL)03/93]

quarter page art:0020052-D

Battery voltage gauge


83

%*[LG07500(ALL)05/94] Engine Oil Pressure Gauge

*[LG07601(ALL)06/93] This gauge indicates the engine’s oil pressure,not the oil level. However, if your engine’s oillevel is low, it could affect the oil pressure. Withthe engine running, the pointer should moveinto the NORMAL band. If the pointer dropsbelow the NORMAL band while the engine isrunning, you have lost oil pressure andcontinued operation will cause severe enginedamage.

*[LG07701(ALL)03/95] If you lose engine oil pressure:

*[LG07801(ALL)03/95] 1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible.

*[LG07901(ALL)04/95] 2. Shut off the engine immediately or severeengine damage could result.

*[LG08001(ALL)02/95] 3. Check the engine’s oil level, following theinstructions on checking and adding engineoil. Refer to Engine oil in the Index. If youdo not follow these instructions, you orothers could be injured. To assure anaccurate reading, your vehicle should be onlevel ground.

*[LG08051(ALL)03/93] 4. If the level is low, add only as much oil asnecessary before you start the engine again.Do not overfill. Do not operate the engine ifthe pointer is below the NORMAL band,regardless of the oil level. Contact yournearest dealer for further service actions.

*[LG08200(ALL)03/93]

quarter page art:0020057-D

Engine oil pressure gauge


84

%*[LG08900(ALL)01/95] High Beam Light

*[LG09001(ALL)03/95] This light comes on when the headlamps areturned to high beam or when you flash thelights.

*[LG09025(ALL)11/89]


High beam indicator light

%*[LG09300(ALL)05/95] Chime for Headlamps On

[LG09400(ALL)07/95] This chime sounds if the driver or passengerdoor is open when the parking lamps orheadlamps are on. The chime sounds until youclose the door, turn off the lamps or turn theignition to the ON position.

[LG09450(ALL)12/91] NOTE: The chime will not sound when theautolamp has activated the shutoffdelay.

%*[LG09500(ALL)01/95] Fuel Gauge

*[LG09700(ALL)06/93] The fuel gauge displays approximately howmuch fuel is in the fuel tank only when theignition switch is ON.

*[LG09850(ALL)01/95] For a proper fuel gauge indication after addingfuel, the ignition switch should be in the OFFposition while the vehicle is being refueled.

*[LG09900(ALL)01/95] The fuel gauge indicator may vary slightly whilethe vehicle is in motion. This is the result of fuelmovement within the tank. An accurate readingmay be obtained with the vehicle on smooth,level ground.


85

[LG10000(ALL)05/91]

one inch art:0020061-C

Fuel gauge

%*[LG11100(ALL)01/95] Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge

*[LG11201(ALL)03/95] This gauge indicates the temperature of theengine coolant, not the coolant level. If thecoolant is not at its proper level or mixture, thegauge indication will not be accurate.

*[LG11301(ALL)08/95] The pointer moves from the C (cold) mark intothe Normal band as the engine coolant warmsup. It is acceptable for the pointer to fluctuatewithin the Normal band under normal drivingconditions. Under certain driving conditions,such as heavy stop and go traffic or driving uphills in hot weather, the pointer may move tothe top of the Normal band.

*[LG11401(ALL)05/95] If, under any circumstances, the pointer movesabove the NORMAL band, the engine coolant isoverheating and continued operation may causeengine damage.


86

*[LG11501(ALL)01/95] If your engine coolant overheats:

*[LG11601(ALL)03/95] 1. Pull off the road as soon as it is safelypossible.

*[LG11701(ALL)01/95] 2. Turn off the engine.

*[LG11801(ALL)05/95] 3. Let the engine cool. DO NOT REMOVECOOLANT SYSTEM FILL CAP UNTILTHE ENGINE IS COOL.

*[LG11901(ALL)04/95] 4. Check the coolant level following theinstructions on checking and adding coolantto your engine. Refer to Engine coolant in theIndex. If you do not follow theseinstructions, you or others could be injured.

[LG12325(ALL)03/93]


Engine coolant temperature gauge


87

%*[LG12601(ALL)01/95] Speedometer

*[LG12700(ALL)01/95] The speedometer tells you how many miles(kilometers) per hour your vehicle is moving.

*[LG12750(ALL)08/95] Your vehicle contains a speedometer whichreceives its input from the Anti-Lock brakesensor. The speedometer is also used to providea speed signal for correct operation of thevehicle’s Powertrain Control Module (PCM),electronic transmission, and speed control (if soequipped). Because of this, it is veryIMPORTANT to change the speedometer’sinternal conversion constant if the size of thetires on the vehicle is changed. Changing theconversion constant to the proper value whenthe tires are changed will also ensure that thespeedometer retains the original factory-setaccuracy.

[LG12752(ALL)08/95] NOTE: The conversion constant can only bechanged six times once the vehicleleaves the factory. Your Ford dealershipservice personnel can change theconversion constant.

*[LG12753(ALL)08/95] Some vehicles are equipped with a vehicle speed(mph/km/h) limiting device that is containedwithin the Powertrain Control Module (PCM).The purpose of this device is to maintain peakvehicle speed below a specified limit. (Vehiclespeed limits may vary based on enginedisplacement.)


88

*[LG12756(ALL)05/95] If you are experiencing an “engine cut-out”condition at high speeds, it may be the result ofthis limiting device. It is a normal condition andcan be avoided by reducing vehicle/enginespeed.

[LG12760(ALL)05/95]


Speedometer

%*[LG13130(ALL)10/92] Odometer/Trip Odometer

*[LG13160(ALL)07/95] The Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) odometer is acombination trip odometer and total odometer.The total odometer is normally displayed. To seethe trip odometer, press and release the SELECTbutton on the upper right side of thespeedometer. To zero out the trip odometer,press and release the RESET button on theupper left side of the speedometer while the tripodometer is displayed. If the trip odometer isdisplayed, press and release the SELECT buttonto return the display to the total odometer value.


109

Steering Column Controls

*[SC00400(ALL)01/95] The controls on the steering column and wheelare designed to give you easy access to thecontrols while you are driving.

%*[SC00500(ALL)01/95] The Turn Signal Lever

*[SC00600(ALL)01/95] You can use the turn signal lever on the left sideof the steering column to:

*[SC00700(ALL)03/95] ❑operate the turn signals and cornering lamps

*[SC00800(ALL)01/95] ❑ turn the high beams on/off

*[SC00900(ALL)05/95] ❑ flash the lamps

*[SC01000(ALL)01/95] ❑ turn the windshield wipers and washeron/off

%*[SC01100(ALL)01/95] Turn Signals

[SC01700(ALL)05/95]


Turn signal operation

File:07cpsca.exUpdate:Tue Aug 29 17:38:34 1995

110

*[SC01800(ALL)11/89] If the turn indicator light in the instrumentpanel does not illuminate or remains on (doesn’tflash) when you signal a turn, the turn signalingsystem is malfunctioning. Have this conditioncorrected as soon as possible, but make sure thatyou use the accepted hand signals in themeantime.

%*[SC03200(ALL)03/95] High Beams and Flashing the Lamps

[SC03800(ALL)05/95]


Headlamp high beam and flash-to-pass operation

%*[SC04400(ALL)03/95] Windshield Wipers and Washer

*[SC04500(ALL)03/95] To turn on the windshield wipers, the ignitionkey must be turned to the ON or ACC position.

[SC04950(ALL)05/95]


Interval wiper on turn signal lever — wiper and washeroperation


111

*[SC05000(ALL)02/95] To set the interval wipers, rotate the knob at theend of the turn signal lever toward or awayfrom the instrument panel to the intervaloperation you desire.

*[SC05200(ALL)08/95] To clean the windshield, push in the end of thewiper knob. For a constant spray, keep the knobpushed in. After you release the knob, thewipers operate for two to three cycles beforeturning off (if wipers were off) or returning tothe selected setting.

[SC05250(ALL)06/95] NOTE: The addition of shields to the front ofthe vehicle (e.g., bug shields) mayadversely affect the windshield washersystem from delivering fluid to thewindshield. Devices such as bugshields are not recommended for yourFord vehicle.

*[SC05300(ALL)01/95] Do not try to clean the windshield when thewasher fluid container is empty or activate thewashers at any time for more than 15 secondscontinuously. This could damage the washerpump system.

*[SC05400(ALL)01/93] RWARNING

In freezing weather, the washer solutionmay freeze on the windshield and obscureyour vision. Always warm up thewindshield with the defroster before youuse the washer fluid. If you cannot seethrough the windshield clearly, it canincrease the risk of being involved in acollision.

*[SC005450(ALL)07/95] For information about refilling the washer fluidor replacing your windshield wiper blades, seeWindshield washer fluid and Wipers in the Index.


112

%*[SC05475(ALL)07/95] Gearshift Lever[SC05495(ALL)08/95] The gearshift lever on your Aerostar is mounted

on the steering column. On the end of thegearshift lever is the OVERDRIVE OFF button.For additional information about the gearshiftlever and the OVERDRIVE OFF button, see theDriving Your Aerostar chapter.

[SC05500(ALL)07/95]


Overdrive off button

[SC05504(ALL)07/95] OVERDRIVE OFF Light on GearshiftLever

[SC05508(ALL)07/95] This light indicates the operating range of thetransmission. The word OFF illuminates on thelever when the OVERDRIVE OFF button isdepressed.


113

%*[SC05510(ALL)03/95] Hazard Flasher

*[SC05520(ALL)04/95] The hazard flasher is used to alert other driversto hazardous situations.

*[SC05525(ALL)10/92] The flashers will continue to flash with the brakepedal depressed.

*[SC05530(ALL)08/95] The flashers work whether your vehicle isrunning or not. The flashers work for up to twohours when the battery is fully charged and ingood condition without draining the batteryexcessively. If the flashers run for longer thantwo hours or if the battery is not fully charged,the battery power can be drained.

*[SC05540(ALL)09/93] To use the hazard flasher:

*[SC05550(ALL)10/92] 1. Push in the flasher button; it will pop outand the lamps will begin to flash.

*[SC05560(ALL)10/92] 2. To stop the flashers, push in the flasherbutton again.

*[SC05562(ALL)08/95] NOTE: The flasher button will be sticking upslightly higher when on than when off.

[SC05575(ALL)08/95]

one quarter page art:0095077-A

Hazard flasher


114

%*[SC05600(ALL)01/95] Horn

*[SC05800(ALL)05/95] To sound the horn, press either horn pad.

*[SC06150(ALL)06/93]

one third page art:0020086-B

Horn location (with speed control option)

%*[SC06200(ALL)05/95] Tilt Steering (If equipped)


Never adjust the steering wheel when thevehicle is moving. You could lose controlof the vehicle and injure someone.

[SC06500(ALL)07/95]

one third page art:0020089-C

Turn signal and tilt steering release lever


115

*[SC06750(ALL)04/95] To change the position of the steering wheel,pull the release lever on the column toward you.Tip the steering wheel to the desired position.Release the lever to lock the steering wheel inplace.

*[SC07250(ALL)12/89] Be sure the steering wheel locks in a notch. It isnot infinitely adjustable. Do not adjust thesteering wheel while the vehicle is in motion.

%*[SC07300(ALL)03/91] Speed Control (If equipped)[SC07700(ALL)06/95]


Speed control switches on the steering wheel


116

*[SC07800(ALL)03/95] To set the speed control:

[SC07900(ALL)06/95]


[SC08630(ALL)07/95] NOTE: If your speed increases above your setspeed while driving in j (Overdrive)on a downhill grade, you may want toselect Drive (by cancelling Overdrive)to reduce vehicle speed. This can beaccomplished by pushing in thetransmission control switch located onthe end of the gearshift lever. Thespeed control cannot reduce the vehiclespeed if it goes above your set speedon a downhill grade. For the best fueleconomy during normal drivingconditions, leave the transmission in j(Overdrive), or return to Overdrive assoon as practical.


117


Do not use the speed control in heavytraffic or on roads that are winding,slippery, or unpaved.

*[SC08801(ALL)05/95] In mountainous areas, at higher elevations, orwhen pulling a trailer, the speed control maynot be able to maintain the preset speed withthe transmission in j (Overdrive).

[SC08900(ALL)07/95] To maintain a preset speed with an automatictransmission under these conditions, select Driveby cancelling Overdrive. You can switch toDrive at any speed. For the best fuel economyduring normal driving conditions, leave thetransmission in j (Overdrive).


Do not shift the transmission into N(Neutral) with the speed control on.

*[SC09500(ALL)05/95] You can use the accelerator pedal to speed upmomentarily. When you take your foot off theaccelerator, the vehicle will return to the setspeed.


118

[SC09525(ALL)06/95] To turn off the speed control or to reset thespeed:

[SC09575(ALL)07/95]


*[SC10800(ALL)06/95] In addition, the speed control is turned off eachtime you turn the vehicle off.


119

*[SC11100(ALL)11/89] Driving uphill or on a steep grade

*[SC11200(ALL)05/95] When the speed control is on, your vehicle maysignificantly drop speed when driving uphill,especially with a heavy load. If the speed dropsmore than 8 to 14 mph (15 - 25 km/h) theautomatic speed control will, by design, becanceled. You may have to temporarily resumemanual speed control while driving up a steepgrade in order to maintain the speed you desire.

*[SC11400(ALL)06/95] If the speed control “dropped out” after yourclimb is completed, the speed of your vehiclecan be reset with the SET ACCEL switch, orreturned to the previous set speed with theRESUME switch, as long as you are driving over30 mph (50 km/h).

[SC11425(ALL)06/95] To cancel speed control and then resume a setspeed:

[SC11450(ALL)06/95]



120


If your vehicle has speed control, do notuse it on slippery roads. You could losecontrol of your vehicle and could injuresomeone.

*[SC11950(ALL)06/95] Use of radio transmitting equipment that is notFederal Communications Commission (FCC) orin Canada the Canadian Radio andTelecommunications Commission (CRTC)approved may cause the speed control tomalfunction. Therefore, use only properlyinstalled FCC (CRTC in Canada) approved radiotransmitting equipment in your vehicle.


121

Features

*[FV00501(ALL)02/95] Your vehicle has a variety of features designedfor your comfort, convenience and safety. Readthis chapter to find out about standard andoptional features.

%*[FV00601(ALL)01/95] Doors

*[FV00701(ALL)06/95] Door Handles and Locks

[FV01000(ALL)03/91]


Inside handles

File:08cpfva.exUpdate:Tue Aug 29 17:41:55 1995

122

[FV01401(ALL)03/91]


Outside handles and locks

%*[FV01801(ALL)03/95] Anti-theft front door lock knobs

*[FV01901(ALL)10/89] Anti-theft lock knobs are designed to precludeunlocking the door by pulling up on the bullettype lock knob. To unlock and open the frontdoor from the inside of the vehicle, pull on theinside door handle.

*[FV03801(ALL)04/95] Sliding Door

[FV03901(ALL)08/95] With the door unlocked, unlatch the sliding doorby pulling the inside handle to the rear, or bypulling the outside handle out and rearward. Toclose, push the inside handle forward or pull theoutside handle forward.

[FV04101(ALL)11/89]


Sliding door handles


123

*[FV04301(ALL)01/89] Liftgate opening procedure

[FV04401(ALL)07/95] 1. Insert the key into the lock and turn itcounterclockwise. You can also unlock thelatch (but not release it) with the power doorlock system (if equipped).

*[FV04500(ALL)01/89] 2. Reach under the license plate light shieldand release the liftgate latch by squeezingthe paddle handle rearward.

[FV04600(ALL)03/94] 3. To make the gate swing up to the fullyopened position, pull back and upward onthe latch paddle handle.

[FV04800(ALL)10/90]


Opening the liftgate

*[FV05300(ALL)10/89] Make certain that you close the liftgate door andwindow before driving your vehicle. If you donot, possible damage may occur to the liftgatedoor lift cylinders and attaching hardware.

*[FV05400(ALL)08/95] RWARNING

When driving your vehicle make sure thatthe liftgate door and window are closed toprevent exhaust fumes from being drawninto the vehicle. This will also preventcargo from falling out.


124

*[FV05500(ALL)01/89] Liftgate closing procedure

*[FV05600(ALL)01/89] 1. To make the liftgate swing downward, reachup and pull the lower edge of the liftgate (orthe loop handle on the inner trim panel ofvehicles with this option) and pulldownward.

*[FV05700(ALL)01/89] 2. When you have pulled down the liftgateenough so that you can reach the licenseplate light shield, push the shield down andforward to close the latch and liftgate. Atthis point, the latch is not locked.

[FV05800(ALL)07/95] 3. You can lock the liftgate latch by pushingdown the lock button before you pull downand close the liftgate. You can also lock theliftgate latch by inserting your vehicle’s doorkey and turning it clockwise after you haveclosed the liftgate, or by using the powerdoor locks (if equipped).

*[FV05900(ALL)12/93] The liftgate area is only intended for cargo, notpassengers. You can open and close the liftgatefrom outside the vehicle. It cannot be openedfrom inside the cargo area.


125

[FV08800(ALL)02/91] Dual Rear Cargo Door (If equipped)

[FV09300(ALL)05/90]


Opening the right rear door

[FV09400(ALL)06/95] To open the left rear door, open the right reardoor and then pull up on the tee-shaped handlelocated on the inside of the left rear door.

[FV09500(ALL)05/90] To open the right side cargo door from theinside of your vehicle, find the slot on the doorand pull the door handle inward.

[FV09600(ALL)05/90]


Opening the right side cargo door from the inside

[FV09700(ALL)03/95] When closing the dual rear cargo doors,remember to close the left rear door first.


Do not operate your vehicle with the reardouble doors open.


126

%*[FV14100(ALL)04/95] Power Door Locks (If equipped)

[FV14200(ALL)03/91] The power door lock switches are located in thefront doors. To lock all doors push the switchmarked LOCK. To unlock all doors push theswitch marked UNLOCK.

*[FV14300(ALL)03/94] Memory lock (sliding door)

[FV14401(ALL)08/95] Your vehicle has a sliding door memory lockfeature that does not require the sliding door tobe closed before using the power locks. Thelocking function will activate after the door isclosed.

*[FV14701(ALL)03/91] The manual door locks will override the powerdoor lock controls.

[FV14801(ALL)05/91]

quarter page art:0020201-C

Power door lock controls


127

%*[FV19250(ALL)02/95] Windows[FV20500(ALL)01/89] Sliding side windows

[FV20700(ALL)08/95]


Opening the sliding side window

%*[FV22901(ALL)03/91] Using the Power Windows (If equipped)

[FV23001(ALL)06/95] Each front door has a power control that opensand closes the window on that door. Thedriver’s door has a master control switch thatoperates both front door windows. You mustplace the ignition switch in the ON or ACCposition to use your power window controls.


When driving your vehicle make sure thatthe liftgate door and window are closed toprevent exhaust fumes from being drawninto the vehicle. This will also preventcargo from falling out.


Do not let children play with the powerwindows. They may seriously hurtthemselves. Make sure occupants are clearof the window(s) before closing.


128

[FV24001(ALL)08/95]


Power window controls — driver-side shown

%*[FV24101(ALL)01/95] Seats%*[FV24801(ALL)05/90] Adjusting the Front Seat Manually

[FV24825(ALL)06/95] You can move the driver seat forward orbackward. If your vehicle is equipped with theoptional reclining bucket seat, you can also tiltthe seatback up to 30 degrees rearward.

[FV25401(ALL)04/89] The front passenger seat cannot be adjusted.

[FV25425(ALL)06/95]


Seat adjustment levers


Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatbackwhen the vehicle is moving.


129


Do not pile cargo higher than theseatbacks to avoid injuring people in acollision or sudden stop.


To reduce the risk of serious injury in acollision, always drive and ride with yourseatback upright and the lap belt snugand low across the hips.



*[FV26350(ALL)05/95] To move the seat forward or backward:

[FV26450(ALL)06/95]



130

*[FV26550(ALL)06/95] To recline the seatback:

[FV26590(ALL)06/95]


[FV29801(ALL)09/89] E-Z Access Operation — Passenger SideRear Captain’s Chair (Optional QuadBuckets)

[FV29901(ALL)05/89] To provide easy access to the rear of the vehicle,the passenger side rear captain’s chair can betilted forward.

*[FV30001(ALL)11/93] To tilt seat forward:

*[FV30101(ALL)11/93] 1. Put the seatback in the upright position.

[FV30200(ALL)02/92] 2. Lift upward on the lower handle on theright (outboard) side of the seat.

*[FV30300(ALL)11/93] 3. The seat can now be tilted forward.

*[FV30401(ALL)11/93] To latch the seat in its normal position, pushseatback rearward until it is latched in position.


131

%*[FV31201(ALL)12/91] Quick Release Rear Captain Chairs

*[FV31400(ALL)12/91] To remove:

[FV31500(ALL)02/92] 1. For right hand seats, lift and rotate the seatlatch handle (located under the seat)rearward, causing the J hook to disengagefrom the front floor well retainer.

[FV31600(ALL)02/92] For left hand seats, lift and rotate the seatlatch handle (located under the seat)rearward, causing the J hook to disengagefrom the front floor well retainer. Disengagethe lap/shoulder safety belt from the seat byinserting a key or similar device into the slotin the detachable anchor and lifting upward.Stow the tongue end of the detachableanchor as shown.

[FV31801(ALL)05/89] 2. Push the seat assembly rearward todisengage the front and rear floor hooks andlift the seat assembly from the vehicle.


132

*[FV32200(ALL)12/91] To install the rear bucket seat:

[FV32300(ALL)12/91] 1. Lift the seat assembly into the vehicle anddrop the front and rear floor hooks into thefloor wells at a point just behind the floorattachment pins.

[FV32500(ALL)05/89] 2. Rotate the seat latch handle forward, causingthe J hook to engage over the front of theforemost well retainer.

[FV32801(ALL)02/92] 3. For right hand seats, continue rotating theseat latch handle until it comes to acomplete stop on the top of the tube. Thiswill cause the seat assembly to slide forward,engaging the front and rear floor hooks withthe floor well retainers.

[FV32901(ALL)02/92] For left hand seats, push the seat latchhandle downward to a full stop. This locksthe seat in position. Before you engage thesafety belt, be sure it is not twisted. Removeany twist, then insert the tongue end of thedetachable anchor into the detachable anchoruntil you hear a “snap” and feel the latchengage.


Check to see that the seat is latchedsecurely in position. Keep floor area freeof objects that would prevent proper seatengagement. Never attempt to adjust theseat latch while the vehicle is in motion.


133

[FV33601(ALL)05/89] Two and Three Passenger Bench Seats andSeat Bed Assemblies

[FV33700(ALL)07/92] NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with aBuilt-In Child Seat, make sure thechild seat is properly stowed beforeoperating the seat bed.

*[FV33801(ALL)03/91] To remove seat assembly:

*[FV33901(ALL)06/92] 1. Disengage the lap/shoulder safety belt fromthe seat by inserting a key or screwdriverinto the slot in the detachable anchor andlifting upward. Stow the tongue end of thedetachable anchor as shown in theillustration.


134

[FV34001(ALL)08/95]


Location of the detachable anchor warning label on safetybelt


135

[FV34101(ALL)03/93]


Rear seat shoulder safety belt — stowage (with seatremoved)


136

[FV34201(ALL)08/95]


Location of the stowage hook caution label on safety belt


137

[FV34301(ALL)08/95]

three fourths page art:0020880-C

Proper stowage of shoulder safety belt


138


When reinstalling a rear seat in yourvehicle it must be placed in its originalposition. Improper installation of the seatwill prevent correct use of the safety beltsand could increase the risk of injury.Refer to the warning label on the seatbelt.

[FV34501(ALL)08/95] 2. Fold the seatback forward and latch it in thedown position (bench seat only).

[FV34601(ALL)03/91] 3. Rotate the seat latch handles (located underthe seat near the floor) upward, causing thelatch hooks to disengage from the floorattachment.

[FV34701(ALL)03/91] 4. Lift seat at rear and rotate about the forwardattachment. When seat latches are clear offloor attachments, release the latch handles.

[FV34801(ALL)03/91] 5. Pull the seat rearward to disengage it fromthe front floor pins.

*[FV34901(ALL)05/89] Be careful that the latches are not damagedwhen the seats are stored.

*[FV35001(ALL)05/89] To install the seat assembly:

*[FV35100(ALL)10/90] 1. Clear the area of debris around the seat floorattachments.

[FV35200(ALL)07/92] 2. With the seatback in a folded and latchedposition (bench seat only), place the seatassembly in your vehicle and engage thefront seat hooks onto the forward attachmentpin in the floor wells.

*[FV35300(ALL)10/90] 3. Rotate the seat downward and engage thelatch into the rear floor attachment. Liftingof the latch handles is not required forinstallation.


139

*[FV35400(ALL)10/90] 4. Ensure that the latch handles are fully seatedin the down position.

[FV35500(ALL)06/95] 5. Before you engage the safety belt, be sure itis not twisted. A twisted safety belt maycause the retractor to work improperly.Remove any twist, then insert the tongueend of the detachable anchor into thedetachable anchor until you hear a “snap”and feel the latch engage. Refer to theprevious illustration.

[FV35600(ALL)12/91] The two passenger bench or bed seat must beinstalled in the first row behind the front seatson wagons with seven passenger seating.

*[FV35701(ALL)01/92] To fold down the rear seatback:

[FV35801(ALL)07/92] To lower the rear seatback down to its cargo orbed position, release the seatback latch bymoving the release lever forward for the benchseat or upward for the seat bed. Then fold theseatback down. The latch will re-engage in thecargo position.

[FV35901(ALL)08/95] To raise the seatback, release the seatback latchand rotate the seatback upwards until the latchre-engages. (A slight downward pressure on thebench seat seatback will reduce effort on thelatch.)


140

[FV36001(ALL)06/95]


Installation and removal of the second and third passengerbed and bench seat


Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatbackwhen the vehicle is moving.


Always latch the vehicle seat to the floor,whether the seat is occupied or empty. Ifnot latched, the seat may cause injuryduring a sudden stop.


Before using the seat, make sure that thelatch hooks are securely locked around thefloor pins.


141

%*[FV42101(ALL)12/89] Seat/bed conversion

[FV42200(ALL)01/89] The seat/bed can be either a two passenger orthree passenger seat.

*[FV42301(ALL)05/89] To convert the seat/bed to a bed:

[FV42401(ALL)07/92] 1. Pull up the release lever located on righthand side of the seat, and at the same timepush the seatback rearward.

[FV42601(ALL)08/95] 2. Push the top of the seatback down until itlatches.

[FV42701(ALL)05/91] The two passenger seat cushion will moveforward when going from the seat to the bedposition.

*[FV42900(ALL)01/89] To convert the bed to a seat:

*[FV43000(ALL)07/92] 1. While in front of the seat, pull the releaselever up and at the same time pull theseatback up. Raise the seatback to the fullupright and locked position.

*[FV43100(ALL)02/95] 2. Make sure the safety belts are free andavailable for use.


The seat/bed should not be occupiedwhile the vehicle is moving unless it is inthe upright, fully-latched position.


142

%*[FV47000(ALL)03/94] Using the Power Lumbar Support and SideBolsters

[FV47100(ALL)12/91] Inflating the Lumbar Support (If equipped)

[FV47300(ALL)06/95] If your vehicle is equipped with this option, youcan inflate a lumbar support pad in the seatback.To inflate the lumbar pad, push the INFLATEside of the rocker switch. To deflate, push theDEFLATE side of the switch.

[FV48100(ALL)02/92]


Power lumbar switch

%*[FV49000(ALL)04/95] Cleaning the Seats

*[FV49050(ALL)05/95] Vinyl

*[FV49100(ALL)05/95] For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with asoft, damp cloth. For more thorough cleaning,wipe the surface with a leather and vinyl cleaneror a mild soap.

%*[FV49150(ALL)04/95] Fabric

*[FV49200(ALL)05/95] Remove dust and loose dirt with a whisk broomor a vacuum cleaner. Remove fresh spotsimmediately. Follow the directions that comewith the cleaner.

*[FV49250(ALL)04/95] NOTE: Before using any cleaner, test it on asmall, hidden area of fabric. If thefabric’s color or texture is adverselyaffected by a particular cleaner, do notuse it.


143

%*[FV49400(ALL)03/91] Underseat Stowage Drawer(If equipped)

[FV49500(ALL)03/95] If your vehicle is equipped with the frontpassenger seat drawer, open it by moving thelatch lever upward and pulling the drawertoward the front of the vehicle. To remove thedrawer, pull past the stop tab on the back of thedrawer.

[FV49800(ALL)05/91]


Underseat stowage drawer — RH front passenger seat only


144

%*[FV50000(ALL)01/95] Mirrors[FV54100(ALL)08/95] For vehicles without rear door windows, the

right-hand side mirror is a flat glass mirror. Allother vehicles have convex right-hand side viewmirrors. Convex mirrors have a curved surfaceand will show a wider view of the lane next toand behind your vehicle.


The side view mirror on the right makesobjects appear smaller and farther awaythan they actually are.

%*[FV54500(ALL)08/91] Dual Electric Remote Control Mirrors(If equipped)

*[FV54600(ALL)08/91] To adjust the remote controlled side mirrors:

[FV54700(ALL)08/95] 1. Locate the switch in the driver’s door trimpanel.

[FV54900(ALL)08/95] 2. Select the right or left mirror by moving thecenter switch to the left-hand or right-handposition. The midway position moves neitherthe left-hand or right-hand mirror.

[FV55100(ALL)06/94] 3. Press the appropriate side of the squaremarked by an arrow indicating the directionof adjustment.

[FV55300(ALL)08/95] 4. Return the center switch to the middleposition to keep the mirror in place.


145

[FV55800(ALL)12/91]


Power mirror control

*[FV55900(ALL)12/91] Do not clean the plastic housing of any electricmirror with gasoline or other petroleum-basedcleaning products.

%*[FV59400(ALL)01/95] Console

*[FV59500(ALL)12/91] Your vehicle may have a full console. The fullconsole has the features shown in the illustrationbelow.

[FV59900(ALL)06/95]


The features on the console


146

[FV65400(ALL)05/91] Garage Door Opener Storage

[FV65500(ALL)05/91] At the center of the console, a compartment isprovided for storage of a garage door openertransmitter. In its stored position, the transmittercan be activated by pressing on the compartmentdoor.

[FV65600(ALL)05/91] To install the transmitter:

[FV65700(ALL)05/91] 1. Push down on latch.

[FV65800(ALL)06/95] 2. Open door by moving hand towards front ofvehicle while maintaining pressure on latch(Figure 1).

[FV65900(ALL)06/95]


[FV66000(ALL)06/95] 3. Remove the backing from the self-adhesiveside of the VelcroTM (supplied with theconsole) and apply it to the back of yourtransmitter.


147

[FV66100(ALL)03/95] 4. Install your transmitter into thecompartment, making sure the actuatorbutton of your transmitter is in line with oneof the pegs on the door when the door isclosed (Figure 2).

[FV66200(ALL)05/91]


[FV66300(ALL)05/91] 5. Once the transmitter is installed, theactuation peg on the door in line with yourtransmitter button may need to be adjustedfor proper function. This can be done usingthe button height adjustment pegs (locatedon the compartment door). Add one peg at atime until pressing the door actuates thetransmitter button (Figure 3).

[FV66400(ALL)05/91]



148

[FV66500(ALL)05/91] 6. By properly adjusting the actuation pegheight, you will be able to actuate yourgarage door by pressing the door as shown(Figure 4).

[FV66600(ALL)05/91]



149

Electron

icS

oun

dS

ystems

*[AS00200(ALL)08/95]


Com

pact

Disc

Rad

io

File:09cpasa.exU

pdate:T

ue Aug 29 17:42:51 1995

150

%*[AS00250(ALL)08/95] Compact Disc Radio

*[AS00300(ALL)08/95] The Compact Disc Radio combines the ElectronicStereo Radio with the Ford Compact Disc Player.

*[AS00350(ALL)08/95] Using the Controls on Your New Radio/CDPlayer

*[AS00400(ALL)08/95] Most of the features of this unit work for bothradio and CD operation. Also, some of the knobsand buttons control several different functions,so be sure to read all of the operatinginstructions carefully.

*[AS00450(ALL)08/95] How to turn the radio on and off

*[AS00500(ALL)08/95] Press the “POWER” button to turn the radio on.Press it again to turn it off.

*[AS00550(ALL)08/95] How to adjust the volume

[AS00600(ALL)08/95] Press the (+/s) end of the “VOL” button toincrease/decrease the volume. Bars illuminate inthe display to show the relative volume level.

*[AS00650(ALL)08/95] NOTE: If the volume level is set above acertain listening level when theignition switch is turned off, when theignition switch is turned back on, thevolume will come back to a “nominal”listening level. However, if the radiopower is turned off, the volume willremain in the position it was set atwhen radio power was switched off.

*[AS00700(ALL)08/95] Selecting the AM or FM frequency band

*[AS00750(ALL)08/95] Push the “AM/FM” button to select the desiredfrequency band. When in the radio mode,pushing the button more than once will alternatebetween AM, FM1 and FM2. These functions areused with the station memory buttons describedunder How to tune radio stations.

File:09cpasa.exUpdate:Tue Aug 29 17:42:51 1995

151

%*[AS00800(ALL)08/95] How to tune radio stations

*[AS00850(ALL)08/95] There are four ways for you to tune in aparticular station. You can manually locate thestation using the “SCAN/TUNE” button,“SEEK” the station, “SCAN” to the station orselect the station by using the memory buttons,which you can set to any desired frequency.These four methods are described below.

*[AS00900(ALL)08/95] ❑Using the “SCAN/TUNE” button to manuallytune

[AS00950(ALL)08/95] You can change the frequency up or downone increment at a time (FM changes inincrements of 200kHz; AM changes inincrements of 10kHz) by first pressing the“SCAN/TUNE” button twice (display shows“TUNE”), then — within approximately fiveseconds —pressing and releasing either thetop (a) or bottom (b) half of the “SEEK”button. To change frequencies quickly, pressand hold down either the top or bottom halfof the “SEEK” button. While you aremanually tuning, the display will show ablinking “M”.

*[AS01000(ALL)08/95] Manual tuning adjusts your radio to anyallowable broadcast frequency, whether ornot a station is present on that frequency.(See All About Radio Frequencies in thissection.)

*[AS01050(ALL)08/95] ❑Using the “SEEK” function[AS01075(ALL)08/95] This feature on your radio allows you to

automatically select listenable stations up ordown the frequency band. Press the top (a)half of the “SEEK” button to select the nextlistenable station up the frequency band.Press the bottom (b) half of the button toselect the next listenable station down thefrequency band. By pressing and holding thebutton, listenable stations can be passed overto reach the desired station.


152

*[AS01100(ALL)08/95] ❑Using the “SCAN/TUNE” button to scanradio stations

[AS01150(ALL)08/95] Pressing the “SCAN/TUNE” button onceenters the scan mode (display will indicate“SCN”). Pushing the top (a) half of the“SEEK” button will begin the scan mode upthe frequency band, stopping on eachlistenable station for approximately fiveseconds. Pushing the bottom (b) half of the“SEEK” button will begin the scan modedown the frequency band, again stopping oneach listenable station for approximately fiveseconds.

*[AS01200(ALL)08/95] To stop the scan mode on the presentlysampled station press the “SCAN/TUNE”button again.

*[AS01250(ALL)08/95] ❑Setting the Station Memory Preset buttons

%*[AS01300(ALL)08/95] Your radio is equipped with 5 stationmemory buttons. These buttons can be usedto select up to 5 preset AM stations and 10FM stations (5 in FM1 and 5 in FM2). Followthe easy steps below to set these buttons tothe desired frequencies.

*[AS01350(ALL)08/95] 1. Select a band, then select a frequency.

*[AS01400(ALL)08/95] 2. Press one of the memory preset buttons andhold the button until the sound returns. Thatstation is now held in memory on thatbutton.

*[AS01450(ALL)08/95] 3. Follow the two steps above for each stationmemory preset button you want to set.

*[AS01500(ALL)08/95] NOTE: If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected,the clock and station memory presetbuttons (if programmed in auto mode)will need to be reset.


153

*[AS01550(ALL)08/95] ❑Using the Automatic Memory Load feature

*[AS01600(ALL)08/95] You can activate the Auto Memory Loadfeature by pressing and holding the “AUTOPRESET” button for approximately threeseconds. Auto Memory Load sets all memorybuttons in AM, FM1 and FM2 sequentially byseeking out the first five strong stations forthe respective band and storing them inmemory buttons 1-5. (FM2 will store thesecond set of strong stations from the FMband.)

*[AS01650(ALL)08/95] With Auto Memory Store, you cancontinually set strong stations into yourmemory buttons without losing your existingmemory presets, which is especially handywhile traveling. Your radio will automaticallyset your memory buttons to the strong localstations so you don’t have to continuallymanually tune to existing stations.

*[AS01700(ALL)08/95] Activate Auto Memory Store by pushing the“AUTO PRESET” button once. Your radiowill set the first five strong stations of theband you are in (AM, FM1 or FM2) into thememory buttons. The display will show“AUTO”, then run through the frequencies,stopping momentarily on the stations beingset into the memory buttons. The radio isnow in the “AUTO” mode and the displaywill show “AUTO” each time a preset isactivated.

*[AS01750(ALL)08/95] NOTE: If there are fewer than five strongstations in the frequency band, theremaining unfilled buttons will storethe last strong station detected on theband.


154

*[AS01800(ALL)08/95] After all stations have been filled, the radiowill begin playing the station stored onmemory button 1.

*[AS01850(ALL)08/95] To deactivate the Auto Memory Store modeand return to the manually-set memorybutton stations (or those stations set usingAuto Memory Load), simply push the“AUTO PRESET” button. Display will show“AUTO” then “OFF”. The next time AutoMemory Store is activated on that band, theradio will store the next set of five strongstations.

*[AS01900(ALL)08/95] Using the “AUDIO” button to adjust thetone balance and speaker output

*[AS01950(ALL)08/95] ❑ Increasing or decreasing bass response

*[AS02000(ALL)08/95] Push the “AUDIO” button repeatedly untilthe display reads “BASS.” Push the “+” sideof the “VOL” button to increase bass (more“lows”), and push the “-” side to decreasebass (less “lows”).

*[AS02025(ALL)08/95] ❑ Increasing or decreasing treble response

*[AS02050(ALL)08/95] Push the “AUDIO” button repeatedly untilthe display reads “TREB.” Push the “+” sideof the “VOL” button to increase treble (more“highs”), and push the “-” side to decreasetreble (less “highs”).

*[AS02100(ALL)08/95] ❑Adjusting speaker balance

*[AS02150(ALL)08/95] Balance control allows you to adjust thesound distribution between the right and leftspeakers. Push the “AUDIO” buttonrepeatedly until the display reads “BAL.”Push the “+” side of the “VOL” button toshift the sound to the right speakers, andpush the “-” side to shift the sound to theleft speakers.


155

*[AS02200(ALL)08/95] ❑Adjusting speaker fader

*[AS02250(ALL)08/95] Fade control allows you to adjust the sounddistribution between the front and rearspeakers. Push the “AUDIO” buttonrepeatedly until the display reads “FADE.”Push the “+” side of the “VOL” button toshift the sound to the front speakers, andpush the “-” side to shift the sound to therear speakers.

*[AS02275(ALL)08/95] NOTE: Illuminated bars in the display showrelative levels of bass and treble andpositions of speaker balance and faderfunctions after adjustments are made,then revert to volume level set.

%*[AS02300(ALL)08/95] Clock operation

[AS02325(ALL)08/95] When in the radio mode, push the “CLOCK”button to switch from radio frequency to clock.Only the clock numerals will be displayed in theclock mode — there is no AM/PM indication.When in the clock mode, the time will bedisplayed until the button is pushed again.However, if you retune the radio while it is inthe clock mode, the new radio frequency will bedisplayed for approximately ten seconds andthen change back to clock display.

*[AS02350(ALL)08/95] When in the CD mode, push the “CLOCK”button to change the display from elapsed timemode to track number mode to clock mode. Ifthe CD track selection is changed when you arein the clock or elapsed time mode, the new tracknumber will be displayed for approximately tenseconds and then revert back to the previousmode.

*[AS02375(ALL)08/95] The clock can also be viewed with the ignitionoff. Push the “CLOCK” button and the time willbe displayed momentarily.


156

*[AS02400(ALL)08/95] To set the clock, simultaneously press the“CLOCK” button and either the bottom (b) halfof the “SEEK” button to set hours, or the top(a) half of the “SEEK” button to set minutes.

%*[AS02425(ALL)08/95] Using the Controls on Your New CompactDisc Player

*[AS02450(ALL)08/95] Your new Ford Compact Disc Player is capableof playing 12 cm or 8 cm discs, without anadapter. The Player operates when the power ison and a disc is inserted (label side up). Handlethe disc by its edge only. (Be sure to read andfollow all of the care and cleaning instructionsunder How To Take Care of and Clean Your CDPlayer and Discs.)

*[AS02475(ALL)08/95] NOTE: If after you insert a disc, the disc isejected and “ERROR” begins scrollingin the display, remove the disc andreinsert it right side up (label side up).

*[AS02500(ALL)08/95] The digital display on your CD player willeither show the track (selection) number or theelapsed time. (The display mode can be selectedby pressing the “CLOCK” button.) Indicators forplay (a), stop (X) and compression on (“C”)are also in the display. (These features aredescribed later.)

*[AS02525(ALL)08/95] Once a disc is inserted, operation of the CDplayer will override that of the radio.

[AS02550(ALL)08/95] NOTE: The volume, bass, treble, balance andfader controls on the radio are alsoused with the CD player. Refer toearlier operating instructions aboutthese controls.


157

*[AS02575(ALL)08/95] How to insert a disc and begin play

*[AS02600(ALL)08/95] Insert one disc, label side up into the discopening. When inserted, the disc automaticallyloads into the unit and play starts at thebeginning of the first track (selection).

*[AS02625(ALL)08/95] When the disc reaches the end, the disc playerautomatically returns to the beginning of thedisc and resumes playing.

*[AS02650(ALL)08/95] NOTE: Once a disc is inserted, the discopening is secured to prevent theaccidental insertion of a second disc.

*[AS02675(ALL)08/95] NOTE: The CD player has heat protectioncircuitry to protect the laser diode. Ifthe temperature of the player reaches167˚F (75˚C), the heat detection circuitwill shut off the player and “TOOHOT” will scroll in the display forapproximately five seconds (radio willresume playing). When the temperaturereturns to normal operating range, theCD player will again be operational.

*[AS02700(ALL)08/95] How to stop and restart the CD player

[AS02725(ALL)08/95] When a disc is loaded, the unit automaticallyenters the play mode and the play indicator (a)illuminates. To stop temporarily, press the“PLAY/STOP” button or the “AM/FM” button.The stop indicator (X) in the display illuminatesand operation returns to the radio mode. Toresume CD play, press the “PLAY/STOP”button once again.

*[AS02750(ALL)08/95] NOTE: If the ignition key is turned OFFduring play and then is set to the ONor ACCESSORY position, the CDplayer will resume playing in the modeit was in when ignition was turned off.


158

*[AS02775(ALL)08/95] Using the “SEEK” feature

*[AS02800(ALL)08/95] The “SEEK” feature allows you to quickly find aparticular selection on the disc.

*[AS02825(ALL)08/95] Press the bottom (b) half of the “SEEK” buttononce to repeat the current playing selection.Press the top (a) half of the “SEEK” button toadvance to the next selection.

*[AS02850(ALL)08/95] Pressing and holding the bottom (b) or top (a)half of the “SEEK” button will scroll backwardand forward respectively through the tracks.

*[AS02875(ALL)08/95] How to fast forward or reverse your CDplayer

*[AS02900(ALL)08/95] To quickly search for a particular point in aselection, press the “FF” button (to fast forward)or the “REV” button (to reverse). While eitherbutton is pressed, the disc goes forward orbackward at two different speeds depending onhow long the button is held down. (Pressingeither button for more than three seconds willspeed up the process.) Release the button at thedesired point (found by watching the elapsedplaying time in the display or by listening to thesound during fast forward or reverse). Whenyou have reached the beginning of track 1, theCD player will begin playing.

*[AS02925(ALL)08/95] When you have reached the end of the disc bykeeping the fast forward button pressed, thedisplay will show “END” and the player will gointo pause mode. Push the “PLAY/STOP”button to begin playing the first track of thedisc, press the “REV” button to back up fromthe end of the disc, or use the “SEEK” functionto locate a desired track.


159

*[AS02950(ALL)08/95] Using the “SCAN” function

*[AS02975(ALL)08/95] Press the “SCAN/TUNE” button to enter thescan mode. Once in the scan mode, press the top(a) or bottom (b) half of the “SEEK” button toscan forward or reverse, respectively. The CDplayer will begin scanning the disc, stopping oneach listenable track for approximately eightseconds. This continues until you press the“SCAN/TUNE” button a second time. While inthe scan mode, the display shows the currentsampled track number.

*[AS03000(ALL)08/95] Special features of your CD player

*[AS03025(ALL)08/95] ❑Compression

*[AS03050(ALL)08/95] The compression feature will bring soft andloud passages closer together for a moreconsistent listening level.

*[AS03075(ALL)08/95] To turn the compression on, press the“COMP” button. When on, the compressionindicator (“C”) will appear in the display.Press the button again to turn off.

*[AS03100(ALL)08/95] ❑Automatic Disc Storage

*[AS03125(ALL)08/95] If the disc is ejected from the CD player butis not removed from the disc opening withinapproximately 10 seconds, the player willautomatically reload the disc for storage,unless the disc is automatically ejected due toa “focus error” (disc inserted upside down).In this case, the disc will not be automaticallyreloaded.


160

*[AS03150(ALL)08/95] How to eject the disc

*[AS03175(ALL)08/95] Push the “EJECT” button to stop play, eject thedisc and resume radio operation of your audiosystem.

*[AS03200(ALL)08/95] NOTE: You can eject the disc while the radiopower and/or ignition is on or off.

%*[AS03225(ALL)08/95] How To Take Care of and Clean Your CDPlayer and Discs

*[AS03250(ALL)08/95] To ensure the continued performance of yourFord Compact Disc Player, carefully read thefollowing precautions:

*[AS03275(ALL)08/95] ❑Always handle the disc by its edge. Nevertouch the playing surface.

[AS03281(ALL)08/95] ❑Before playing, inspect the disc for anycontamination. If needed, clean the disc withan approved disc cleaner, such as theDiscwasher Compact Disc Cleaner or theAllsop 3 Compact Disc Cleaner, by wipingfrom the center out to the edges. Do not usea circular motion to clean.

[AS03286(ALL)08/95] ❑Do not clean discs with solvents such asbenzine, thinner, commercially availablecleaners or antistatic spray intended foranalog records.

[AS03291(ALL)08/95] ❑Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight orheat sources such as defroster and floorheating ducts. Do not leave any discs in aparked car in direct sunlight where there maybe a considerable rise in temperature ordamage may result.

[AS03296(ALL)08/95] ❑After playing, store the disc in its case.

*[AS03300(ALL)08/95] ❑ If a disc has already been inserted, do not tryto insert another disc. Doing so may damagethe disc player.

*[AS03325(ALL)08/95] ❑Do not insert anything other than a disc intothe disc player.


161

*[AS03350(ALL)08/95] CAUTION: The use of optical instruments withthis product will increase eye hazard as the laserbeam used in this compact disc player isharmful to the eyes. Do not attempt todisassemble the case. Refer servicing to qualifiedpersonnel only.

*[AS03375(ALL)08/95] Common Operating Conditions of YourCD Player

*[AS03400(ALL)08/95] The following information is designed to helpyou recognize typical situations that could bemistakenly interpreted as mechanicalmalfunctions of the disc player.

*[AS03425(ALL)08/95] ❑A disc is already loaded.

*[AS03450(ALL)08/95] ❑The disc is inserted with the label surfacedownward.

*[AS03475(ALL)08/95] ❑The disc is dusty or defective.

*[AS03500(ALL)08/95] ❑The player’s internal temperature is above140˚F (60˚C). Allow the player to cool offbefore operating.

*[AS03525(ALL)08/95] ❑Different manufacturers of compact discs mayproduce discs with different dimensions ortolerances, some of which may not be withinindustry standards or in accordance with theCD format. Because of this, a new disc that isfree of dust and scratches could be defectiveand may not play on your Ford CompactDisc Player.


162

[AS03550(ALL)08/95] If play does not begin once the disc has beeninserted:

*[AS03575(ALL)08/95] ❑The radio is not on.

*[AS03600(ALL)08/95] ❑The unit is in the stop mode.

*[AS03625(ALL)08/95] ❑Moisture may have condensed on the lenseswithin the unit. If this occurs, remove thedisc and wait approximately an hour until themoisture evaporates.

*[AS03650(ALL)08/95] If the sound skips:

*[AS03675(ALL)08/95] ❑Badly scratched discs or extremely roughroads will cause the sound to skip. Skippingwill not damage the disc player or scratch thediscs.


163

%*[AS03700(ALL)08/95]

High

-Level

Au

dio

System

*[AS03725(ALL)08/95]


High

-Level

Au

dio

System

File:09cpasa.exU

pdate:T

ue Aug 29 17:42:51 1995

164

*[AS03750(ALL)08/95] Using the Controls on Your New Radio

*[AS03775(ALL)08/95] How to turn the radio on and off

*[AS03800(ALL)08/95] Press the “POWER” button to turn the radio on.Press it again to turn it off.

*[AS03825(ALL)08/95] How to adjust the volume

*[AS03850(ALL)08/95] Press the +/s side of the “VOL” button toincrease/decrease the volume. Bars illuminate inthe display to show the relative volume level.

*[AS03875(ALL)08/95] NOTE: If the volume level is set above acertain listening level when theignition switch is turned off, when theignition switch is turned back on, thevolume will come back to a “nominal”listening level. However, if the radiopower is turned off, the volume willremain in the position it was set atwhen radio power was switched off.

*[AS03900(ALL)08/95] Selecting the AM or FM frequency band

*[AS03925(ALL)08/95] Push the “AM/FM” button to select the desiredfrequency band. When in the radio mode,pushing the button more than once will alternatebetween AM, FM1 and FM2. These functions areused with the station memory buttons describedunder How to Tune Radio Stations.

%*[AS03950(ALL)08/95] How to tune radio stations

*[AS03975(ALL)08/95] There are four ways for you to tune in aparticular station. You can manually locate thestation using the “SCAN/TUNE” button,“SEEK” the station, “SCAN” to the station orselect the station by using the memory buttons,which you can set to any desired frequency.These four methods are described below.


165

*[AS04000(ALL)08/95] ❑Using the “TUNE” function

*[AS04025(ALL)08/95] You can change the frequency up or downone increment at a time (FM changes inincrements of 200 kHz; AM changes inincrements of 10 kHz) by first pressing the“SCAN/TUNE” button twice (display shows“TUNE”), then — within approximately fiveseconds — pressing and releasing either theright (a) or left (b) side of the “SEEK”button. To change frequencies quickly, pressand hold down either the right or left side ofthe “SEEK” button.

*[AS04050(ALL)08/95] Manual tuning adjusts your radio to anyallowable broadcast frequency, whether or not astation is present on that frequency. (See AllAbout Radio Frequencies in this section.)

*[AS04075(ALL)08/95] ❑Using the “SEEK” function[AS04100(ALL)08/95] This feature on your radio allows you to

automatically select listenable stations up ordown the frequency band. Press the right(a) side of the “SEEK” button to select thenext listenable station up the frequency band.Press the left (b) side of the button to selectthe next listenable station down thefrequency band. By holding the button down,listenable stations can be passed over to reachthe desired station.

[AS04125(ALL)08/95] ❑Using the “SCAN” function[AS04150(ALL)08/95] Pressing the “SCAN/TUNE” button once

enters the scan mode (display will indicate“SCN”). Pushing the right (a) side of the“SEEK” button will begin the scan mode upthe frequency band, stopping on eachlistenable station for approximately afive-second sampling. Pushing the left (b)side of the “SEEK” button will begin the scanmode down the frequency band, againstopping on each listenable station forapproximately a five-second sampling.


166

[AS04175(ALL)08/95] To stop the scan mode on the presentlysampled station press the “SCAN/TUNE”button again.

[AS04200(ALL)08/95] ❑Setting the Station Memory Preset buttons

[AS04225(ALL)08/95] Your radio is equipped with 5 stationmemory buttons. These buttons can be usedto select up to 5 preset AM stations and 10FM stations (5 in FM1 and 5 in FM2).

[AS04250(ALL)08/95] Follow the easy steps below to set these buttonsto the desired frequencies:

[AS04275(ALL)08/95] 1. Select a band, then select a frequency.

[AS04300(ALL)08/95] 2. Press one of the memory buttons and holdthe button until the sound returns. Thatstation is now held in memory on thatbutton.

[AS04325(ALL)08/95] 3. Follow the two steps above for each stationmemory preset button you want to set.

[AS04350(ALL)08/95] NOTE: If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected,the station memory preset buttons (ifprogrammed in auto mode) will needto be reset.

*[AS04375(ALL)08/95] ❑Using the Automatic Memory Load feature

*[AS04400(ALL)08/95] You can activate the Auto Memory Loadfeature by pressing and holding the “AUTOPRESET” button for approximately threeseconds. Auto Memory Load sets all memorybuttons in AM, FM1 and FM2 sequentially byseeking out the first five strong stations forthe respective band and storing them inmemory buttons 1-5. (FM2 will store thesecond set of strong stations from the FMband.)


167

*[AS04425(ALL)08/95] With Auto Memory Store, you cancontinually set strong stations into yourmemory buttons without losing your existingmemory presets, which is especially handywhile traveling. Your radio will automaticallyset your memory buttons to the strong localstations so you don’t have to continuallymanually tune to existing stations.

*[AS04450(ALL)08/95] Activate Auto Memory Store by pushing the“AUTO PRESET” button once. Your radiowill set the first five strong stations of theband you are in (AM, FM1 or FM2) into thememory buttons. The display will show“AUTO”, then run through the frequencies,stopping momentarily on the stations beingset into the memory buttons. The radio isnow in the “AUTO” mode and this displaywill show “AUTO” each time a preset isactivated.

*[AS04475(ALL)08/95] NOTE: If there are fewer than five strongstations in the frequency band, theremaining unfilled buttons will storethe last strong station detected on theband.

*[AS04500(ALL)08/95] After all stations have been filled, the radiowill begin playing the station stored onmemory button 1.

*[AS04525(ALL)08/95] To deactivate the Auto Memory Store modeand return to the manually-set memorybutton stations (or those stations set usingAuto Memory Load), simply push the“AUTO PRESET” button. Display will show“AUTO” then “OFF”. The next time AutoMemory Store is activated on that band, theradio will store the next set of five strongstations.


168

*[AS04550(ALL)08/95] Adjusting the tone balance and speakeroutput of your radio

*[AS04575(ALL)08/95] ❑ Increasing or decreasing bass response

*[AS04600(ALL)08/95] Push the “AUDIO” button repeatedly untilthe display reads “BASS.” Push the “+” sideof the “VOL” button to increase bass (more“lows”), and push the “-” side to decreasebass (less “lows”).

*[AS04625(ALL)08/95] ❑ Increasing or decreasing treble response

*[AS04650(ALL)08/95] Push the “AUDIO” button repeatedly untilthe display reads “TREB.” Push the “+” sideof the “VOL” button to increase treble (more“highs”), and push the “-” side to decreasetreble (less “highs”).

*[AS04675(ALL)08/95] ❑Adjusting speaker balance

*[AS04700(ALL)08/95] Balance control allows you to adjust thesound distribution between the right and leftspeakers. Push the “AUDIO” buttonrepeatedly until the display reads “BAL.”Push the “+” side of the “VOL” button toshift the sound to the right speakers, andpush the “-” side to shift the sound to theleft speakers.

*[AS04725(ALL)08/95] ❑Adjusting speaker fader

*[AS04750(ALL)08/95] Fade control allows you to adjust the sounddistribution between the front and rearspeakers. Push the “AUDIO” buttonrepeatedly until the display reads “FADE.”Push the “+” side of the “VOL” button toshift the sound to the front speakers, andpush the “-” side to shift the sound to therear speakers.

*[AS04775(ALL)08/95] NOTE: Illuminated bars in the display showrelative levels of bass and treble andpositions of speaker balance and faderfunctions after adjustments are made,then revert to volume level set.


169

%*[AS04800(ALL)08/95] Using the Controls of Your Cassette TapePlayer

*[AS04825(ALL)08/95] How to insert a tape

*[AS04850(ALL)08/95] Your cassette tape player is equipped withpower loading. Once you insert a tape and pushslightly (with the open edge to the right), theloading mechanism draws the tape the rest ofthe way in and play will begin after amomentary tape tightening process. Displayindicates “M” (for metal/CrO

2) while tape is

playing.

*[AS04875(ALL)08/95] NOTE: A cassette tape can be loaded with theignition on whether or not the radiopower is on.

*[AS04900(ALL)08/95] How to locate a desired track on the tape

*[AS04925(ALL)08/95] There are four ways to quickly locate a desiredselection on the tape. You can use the fastforward, rewind, “SEEK” or “SCAN” function.Following are brief descriptions of each.

*[AS04950(ALL)08/95] ❑Fast forwarding the tape

*[AS04975(ALL)08/95] To fast foward the tape, press the “FF”button. The radio will automatically beginplaying until fast forward is manuallystopped. At the end of the tape, the directionautomatically reverses and plays the otherside of the tape.

*[AS05000(ALL)08/95] ❑Rewinding the tape

*[AS05025(ALL)08/95] To rewind the tape, press the “REW” button.

*[AS05050(ALL)08/95] The radio will automatically begin playinguntil rewind is manually stopped or thebeginning of the tape is reached.


170

*[AS05075(ALL)08/95] ❑Using the “SEEK” function with your cassettetape player

*[AS05100(ALL)08/95] While in the tape mode, push the right (a)side of the “SEEK” button to seek forward tothe next selection on the tape. Push the left(b) side to seek the previous tape selection.

*[AS05125(ALL)08/95] NOTE: If you want to restart a currentlyplaying tape selection, press the left(b) side of the “SEEK” button afterapproximately three seconds into thecurrent selection.

*[AS05150(ALL)08/95] Whirling sprockets in the display (l) indicatethe direction of tape travel.

*[AS05175(ALL)08/95] ❑Using the “SCAN” function with yourcassette tape player

*[AS05200(ALL)08/95] Press the “SCAN/TUNE” button to enter thescan mode (display indicates “SCN”).Pushing the right (a) side of the “SEEK”button will begin the forward scan mode onthe tape currently playing, stopping on eachtape selection for approximately aneight-second sampling.

*[AS05225(ALL)08/95] Pushing the left (b) side of the “SEEK”button will begin the reverse scan mode,stopping on each previous tape selection forapproximately an eight-second sampling.While scanning, the display indicates whirlingsprockets plus an “S” (m).

*[AS05250(ALL)08/95] To stop the scan mode on the presentlysampled tape selection press the“SCAN/TUNE” button again.

*[AS05275(ALL)08/95] ❑How to change the side of the tape beingplayed

*[AS05300(ALL)08/95] The alternate track of the tape can be selectedanytime by pressing the “PLAY/PROG”button.


171

*[AS05325(ALL)08/95] How to eject the tape

*[AS05350(ALL)08/95] To stop the tape and eject the cassette, press the“EJCT” button. The radio will resume playing ifthe radio power is on. The tape cartridge can beejected with radio power (and/or ignition) on oroff.

*[AS05375(ALL)08/95] How to store the tape

*[AS05400(ALL)08/95] Press the “AM/FM” button to stop the tapeplayer and resume radio play. The cassette willbe stored in the tape player and the X symbolin the display will be lit until you push the“PLAY PROG” button to resume tape play. Fastforward and fast rewind can be used while thetape is in storage mode without interruptingradio play.

*[AS05425(ALL)08/95] Using the DolbyH B noise reduction feature

*[AS05450(ALL)08/95] NOTE: Noise reduction system manufacturedunder license from Dolby LabsLicensing Corporation. “Dolby” anddouble-D symbol are trademarks ofDolby Laboratories LicensingCorporation.

*[AS05475(ALL)08/95] Push the k button to activate. When on, thek symbol above the button will be lit.

%*[AS05500(ALL)08/95] Clock Operation

*[AS05525(ALL)08/95] How to view the clock mode

*[AS05550(ALL)08/95] Press the “CLOCK” button to alternate thefrequency and time in the display. In the clockmode, pressing any radio function willautomatically display the radio frequency forapproximately ten seconds before changing backto the clock mode.


172

*[AS05575(ALL)08/95] How to set the clock

*[AS05600(ALL)08/95] 1. Turn the radio on.

*[AS05625(ALL)08/95] 2. Press and hold in the “CLOCK” button,press the “SEEK” button left (b) to advancethe hours and right (a) to advance theminutes.

*[AS05650(ALL)08/95] NOTE: The clock displays 12-hour time withno AM/PM indications.

*[AS05675(ALL)08/95] NOTE: On the High-Level Audio System, theclock can be set with the radio poweron or off.

*[AS05700(ALL)08/95] Tape error messages

*[AS05725(ALL)08/95] Your cassette tape player is equipped todiagnose certain problems you may experience.Error codes are as follows:

*[AS05750(ALL)08/95] Error 0 — Communication error between theradio controller and the tape controller. Thecassette player will eject the tape. Insert the tapeagain. If the same error code appears, turn theignition off, then back on again and insert thetape.

*[AS05775(ALL)08/95] Error 1 — Possible problem cartridge. Thecassette tape player will eject the tape. Insert thetape again. If the same error code appears in thedisplay, try a different cartridge.

*[AS05800(ALL)08/95] Error 2 — Tape eject or load failure. Yourcassette tape player will go into the pause mode.Push “EJCT” to eject the tape. If the tape doesn’teject, refer the problem to qualified personnel forservice.


173

*[AS05825(ALL)08/95] Tips on Caring for the Cassette Player andTapes

*[AS05850(ALL)08/95] In order to keep your cassette tape playerperforming the way it was meant to, read andfollow these simple precautions:

*[AS05875(ALL)08/95] ❑Using a Ford Cassette Cleaning Cartridge toclean the tape player head after 10-12 hoursof play will help maintain the best playbacksound and proper tape operation.

*[AS05900(ALL)08/95] ❑Only cassettes that are 90 minutes long orless should be used. Tapes longer than 90minutes are thinner and subject to breakageor may jam the tape player mechanism.

*[AS05925(ALL)08/95] ❑Protect cassettes from exposure to directsunlight, high humidity and extreme heat orcold. If they are exposed to extremeconditions, allow them to reach a moderatetemperature before playing.

*[AS05950(ALL)08/95] ❑ If a tape is loose inside the cassette, tighten itbefore playing by putting your finger or apencil into one of the holes and turning thehub until the tape is tight.

*[AS05975(ALL)08/95] ❑Loose labels on cassette tapes can becomelodged in the mechanism. Remove any looselabel material before inserting cassette.

*[AS06000(ALL)08/95] ❑Do not leave a tape in the cassette tapeplayer. High heat in the vehicle can cause thecassette to warp.


174

%*[AS06550(ALL)08/95]

fullpageart:0060586-C

Electron

icS

tereoR

adio

File:09cpasa.exU

pdate:T

ue Aug 29 17:42:51 1995

175

*[AS06575(ALL)08/95]

fullpageart:0060587-C

Electron

icS

tereoR

adio

with

Cassette

File:09cpasa.exU

pdate:T

ue Aug 29 17:42:51 1995

176

%*[AS06600(ALL)08/95] Electronic Stereo and StereoCassette Radios

*[AS06625(ALL)08/95] Using the Controls on Your New Radio

*[AS06650(ALL)08/95] How to tune radio stations (Stereo Radio)

*[AS06675(ALL)08/95] There are three ways for you to tune in to aparticular station. You can manually locate thestation by using the “TUNE” button, “SEEK” thestation or select the station by using the memorypreset buttons, which you can set to any desiredfrequency.

%*[AS06700(ALL)08/95] How to tune radio stations (Stereo CassetteRadio)

*[AS06725(ALL)08/95] There are four ways for you to tune in to aparticular station. You can manually locate thestation by using Automatic Music Search(“AMS”), “SEEK” the station, “SCAN” to thestation or select the station by using the memorybuttons, which you can set to any desiredfrequency.

*[AS06750(ALL)08/95] ❑Using the “TUNE” function (Stereo Radio)

*[AS06775(ALL)05/95] You can change the frequency up or downone increment at a time by pressing andreleasing either the right (+) or left (s) sideof the “TUNE” button. To change frequenciesquickly, press and hold down either the rightor left side of the “TUNE” button.

*[AS06800(ALL)08/95] Manual tuning adjusts your radio to anyallowable broadcast frequency, whether ornot a station is present on that frequency.(See All About Radio Frequencies in thissection.)


177

*[AS06825(ALL)08/95] ❑Using the “AMS” function to manually tuneyour radio (Stereo Cassette Radio)

[AS06850(ALL)08/95] You can change the frequency up or downone increment at a time by first pressing the“AMS” button (display shows “TUNE”) thenwithin approximately five seconds pressingand releasing either the right (a) or left (b)side of the “SEEK” button. To changefrequencies quickly, press and hold downeither the right or left side of the “SEEK”button.

*[AS06875(ALL)08/95] ❑Using the “SEEK” function

[AS06900(ALL)08/95] Press the right (a) side of the “SEEK”button to select the next listenable station upthe frequency band. Press the left (b) side ofthe button to select the next listenable stationdown the frequency band. By holding thebutton down, listenable stations can bepassed over to reach the desired station.

*[AS07000(ALL)08/95] ❑Using the “SCAN” function (Stereo CassetteRadio)

*[AS07025(ALL)08/95] Press the “SCAN” button to enter the scanmode. The radio will begin scanning up thefrequency band, stopping on each listenablestation for approximately a five-secondsampling. This continues until you press the“SCAN” button a second time.

%*[AS07050(ALL)08/95] Using the Controls of Your Cassette TapePlayer

*[AS07075(ALL)08/95] How to insert a tape

*[AS07100(ALL)08/95] Insert a cassette (with the open edge to theright) firmly into the tape door opening, makingsure the cassette is completely in and “seated.”

*[AS07125(ALL)08/95] NOTE: A cassette tape can be loaded with theignition on whether or not the radiopower is on.


178

*[AS07150(ALL)08/95] How to locate a desired track on the tape

*[AS07175(ALL)08/95] ❑Using the Automatic Music Search (“AMS”)

[AS07200(ALL)08/95] Press and hold the “AMS” button (“AMS”will appear in the display). Then, push theleft (h) button to rewind to the beginningof the current selection or press the right(g) button to fast forward to the beginningof the next selection.

*[AS07225(ALL)08/95] ❑How to change the side of the tape beingplayed

[AS07250(ALL)08/95] The alternate track (other side) of the tapecan be selected at any time by pushing bothfast-wind buttons (h and g) at thesame time.

*[AS07275(ALL)08/95] How to eject the tape

*[AS07300(ALL)08/95] To stop the tape and eject the cassette, press the“EJECT” button. The radio will resume playing.

*[AS07325(ALL)08/95] Using the DolbyH B noise reduction feature

*[AS07350(ALL)08/95] Push the k/memory preset #3 button toactivate. Push again to deactivate.

*[AS07375(ALL)08/95] NOTE: Noise reduction system manufacturedunder license from Dolby LabsLicensing Corporation. “Dolby” anddouble-D symbol are trademarks ofDolby Laboratories LicensingCorporation.

*[AS07400(ALL)08/95] How to view the clock mode

*[AS07425(ALL)08/95] Press the “CLOCK” button to alternate thefrequency and time in the display. In the clockmode, pressing any radio function willautomatically display the radio frequency forapproximatedly ten seconds before changingback to the clock mode.


179

*[AS07450(ALL)08/95] How to set the clock

*[AS07475(ALL)08/95] 1. Turn the radio on.

*[AS07500(ALL)08/95] 2. Press and hold in the “CLOCK” button,press the “SEEK” button left (b) to advancethe hours and right (a) to advance theminutes.

*[AS07525(ALL)08/95] NOTE: The clock displays 12-hour time withno AM/PM indications.

*[AS07550(ALL)08/95] Tips on Caring for the Cassette Player andTapes

*[AS07575(ALL)08/95] In order to keep your cassette tape playerperforming the way it was meant to, read andfollow these simple precautions:

*[AS07600(ALL)08/95] ❑Using a Ford Cassette Cleaning Cartridge toclean the tape player head after 10-12 hoursof play will help maintain the best playbacksound and proper tape operation.

*[AS07625(ALL)08/95] ❑Only cassettes that are 90 minutes long orless should be used. Tapes longer than 90minutes are thinner and subject to breakageor may jam the tape player mechanism.

*[AS07650(ALL)08/95] ❑Protect cassettes from exposure to directsunlight, high humidity and extreme heat orcold. If they are exposed to extremeconditions, allow them to reach a moderatetemperature before playing.

*[AS07675(ALL)08/95] ❑ If a tape is loose inside the cassette, tighten itbefore playing by putting your finger or apencil into one of the holes and turning thehub until the tape is tight.

*[AS07700(ALL)08/95] ❑Loose labels on cassette tapes can becomelodged in the mechanism. Remove any looselabel material before inserting a cassette.

*[AS07725(ALL)08/95] ❑Do not leave a tape in the cassette tapeplayer when not in use. High heat in thevehicle can cause the cassette to warp.


180

*[AS07730(ALL)08/95] Rear Seat Radio Controls

*[AS07735(ALL)08/95] Using the Rear Seat Radio Controls

[AS07740(ALL)08/95] Rear seat radio controls are available on allAerostar models.

[AS07745(ALL)08/95] The rear seat radio controls are located behindthe driver on the left hand side of the vehicle.These controls duplicate several radio functionsof the radio and allow the use of headphones inthe vehicle.

[AS07750(ALL)08/95]


Rear seat radio controls

[AS07755(ALL)08/95] How to turn the rear seat radio controls onand off

[AS07760(ALL)08/95] Press memory preset buttons “1” and “3”simultaneously on the face of your radio to turnthe rear seat radio controls on. A headphonessymbol (j) will appear in the display when therear seat controls are on. Press “1” and “3”simultaneously again to turn the rear seat radiocontrols off.

[AS07765(ALL)08/95] How to adjust the volume

[AS07770(ALL)08/95] Press the right (+) side of the “VOLUME” rockerswitch to increase volume; and push the left (s)side to decrease the volume of the rear speakers.

[AS07775(ALL)08/95] NOTE: Rear seat control volume can be set nohigher than current radio setting unlessspeakers are turned off. See note underHow to turn the speakers on and off.


181

[AS07780(ALL)08/95] Setting the AM or FM frequency band

[AS07785(ALL)08/95] Push the “BAND” button to change thefrequency band.

[AS07790(ALL)08/95] Using the “MEMORY” button

[AS07795(ALL)08/95] Push the “MEMORY” button to access thestation you have set into memory button 1 onthe face of the radio. Successively pushing thisbutton will access, numerically, all stations setinto the Station Memory Preset buttons (1through 5).

[AS07800(ALL)08/95] How to turn the speakers on and off

[AS07805(ALL)08/95] When the rear seat controls are on, push the“SPKRS ON-OFF” button to turn all speakersoff. Push again to turn all speakers on.

[AS07810(ALL)08/95] NOTE: Turning the ignition off then on againwill not turn the speakers back on, ifpreviously turned off by the “SPKRSON-OFF” button on the rear seatcontrols.

[AS07815(ALL)08/95] Using the “SEEK” function

[AS07820(ALL)08/95] Press the right (a) side of the “SEEK” rockerswitch to seek to the next radio station. Press theleft (b) side of the “SEEK” rocker switch toseek to the previous radio station.

[AS07825(ALL)08/95] NOTE: When using the rear seat controls witha High-Level Audio System, the“SEEK” function on the rear seatcontrols will also function withcassettes, seeking the next (“SEEK a”)or previous (“b SEEK”) selection onthe tape.


182

[AS07850(ALL)00/95] Using headphones with the rear seatcontrols

[AS07855(ALL)08/95] Two 3.5mm headphone jacks have beenprovided on the rear seat controls. Plugheadphone(s) into the provided jack(s) tooperate.

%*[AS07860(ALL)08/95] Common Radio Reception Conditions

*[AS07865(ALL)08/95] Several conditions prevent FM reception frombeing completely clear and noise-free, such asthe following:

*[AS07870(ALL)08/95] 1. Distance/Strength

*[AS07875(ALL)08/95] The strength of the FM signal is directly relatedto the distance the signal must travel. Thelistenable range of an average FM signal isapproximately 25 miles (40 kilometers). Beyondthis distance, the radio is operating in a fringearea and the signal becomes weaker.

*[AS07880(ALL)08/95] NOTE: Always make sure your antenna(whether you have a power antenna ora manually adjustable antenna) is fullyextended to its maximum length forproper reception. If your antenna is notfully extended, you may experiencesignal loss while traveling in fringereception areas.

*[AS07885(ALL)08/95] 2. Terrain

*[AS07890(ALL)08/95] The terrain (hilly, mountainous, tall buildings) ofthe area over which the signal travels mayprevent the FM signal from being noise-free.

*[AS07895(ALL)08/95] If there is a building or large structure betweenthe antenna and station, some of the signal“bends” around the building, but certain spotsreceive almost no signal. Moving out of the“shadow” of the structure will allow the stationto return to normal.


183

*[AS07900(ALL)08/95] When the radio waves are reflected off objects orstructures, the reflected signal cancels the normalsignal, causing the antenna to pick up noise anddistortion. Cancellation effects are mostprominent in metropolitan areas, but also canbecome quite severe in hilly terrain anddepressed roadways.

*[AS07905(ALL)08/95] To minimize these conditions, a stereo/monoblend circuit has been incorporated into thissystem. This feature automatically switches aweak stereo signal to a clearer monaural signal,which improves the quality of reception.

*[AS07910(ALL)08/95] Several sources of static are normal conditionson AM frequencies. These can be caused bypower lines, electric fences, traffic lights andthunderstorms.

*[AS07915(ALL)08/95] Another reception phenomenon is Strong SignalCapture and Overload. This can occur whenlistening to a weak station and when passinganother broadcast tower. The close station maycapture the more distant station, although thedisplayed frequency does not change. Whilepassing the tower, the station may switch backand forth a few times before returning to theoriginal station.

*[AS07920(ALL)08/95] When several broadcast towers are present(common in metropolitan areas) several stationsmay overload the receiver, resulting inconsiderable station changing, mixing anddistortion.

*[AS07925(ALL)08/95] Automatic gain control circuitry for both AMand FM bands has been incorporated into thissystem to reduce strong signal capture andoverload.


184

%*[AS07930(ALL)08/95] All About Radio Frequencies*[AS07935(ALL)08/95] The Federal Communications Commission (FCC)

and the Canadian Radio TelecommunicationsCommission (CRTC) establish the frequenciesthat AM and FM radio stations may use fortheir broadcasts. The allowable frequencies are,AM: 530, 540...1600, 1610 kHz in 10 kHz steps;FM: 87.9, 88.1...107.7, 107.9 MHz in 0.2 MHzsteps.

*[AS07940(ALL)08/95] Not all frequencies will be assigned to a givenarea. This radio will tune to each of thesefrequencies using manual tune and no finetuning is necessary as radio stations may not useother frequencies.

*[AS08175(ALL)08/95] Some FM radio stations advertise a“rounded-off” frequency which is not thefrequency they actually broadcast on. Forexample, a radio station that is assigned afrequency of 98.7 MHz may call itself “Radio 99”even though 99.0 MHz is not an allowable FMbroadcast frequency.

%*[AS08200(ALL)08/95] Important Warranty and ServiceInformation

*[AS08225(ALL)08/95] Warranty

*[AS08250(ALL)08/95] Your sound system is warranted for three yearsor 36,000 miles (60,000 kilometers), whichevercomes first. Consult your vehicle warrantybooklet for further information. Ask your dealerfor a copy of this limited warranty.

*[AS08275(ALL)08/95] Service

*[AS08300(ALL)08/95] At Ford Electronics, we stand behind our audiosystems with a comprehensive service and repairprogram. If anything should go wrong withyour Ford audio system, return to your dealerfor service. There is a nationwide network ofqualified Ford authorized repair centers to assistyou.


185

Driving Your Aerostar

[DR00300(ALL)08/95] Automatic TransmissionOperation (4R44E/4R55E)

*[DR00350(ALL)08/95] The 4R44E and 4R55E transmissions areelectronically controlled four speed overdriveautomatic transmissions with lockup torqueconverter. Transmission operation is controlledby the Powertrain Control Module (PCM).

*[DR00425(ALL)08/95] The PCM will automatically adjust transmissionoperation to make up for varying conditions.Several sensors located on the engine andtransmission such as throttle position, enginespeed, vehicle speed and transmissiontemperature are used by the PCM to shift thetransmission into a higher or lower gear whenrequired for the best performance and fueleconomy. For example, you may notice that thetransmission will upshift to a higher gear morequickly when the vehicle has not reached normaloperating temperature.

*[DR00475(ALL)08/95] The PCM also controls the transmission’s TorqueConverter Clutch (TCC) to further raise vehicleperformance and fuel economy. The TCC willengage when the transmission operatingtemperature and other conditions determined bythe PCM have been met. Engagement of theclutch may be noted as a decrease in enginespeed.

[DR00500(ALL)08/95] To help in troubleshooting, the PCM continuallyperforms self-tests on the electronic controlsystem and, if any faults are detected, storesthem in memory. The Overdrive Off IndicatorLight (O/D OFF), which is located on the

File:10cpdra.exUpdate:Tue Aug 29 17:45:28 1995

186

gearshift lever, may flash steadily if amalfunction has been detected. If the OverdriveOff Indicator Light is flashing, contact your Forddealer as soon as possible. If this conditionpersists, damage to the transmission could occur.

*[DR00700(ALL)03/95] Some vehicles are equipped with a PowertrainControl Module that limits engine speeds with acut-out mode to promote durability.

[DR05700(ALL)06/95] Automatic OverdriveTransmission

%*[DR05750(ALL)01/95] Putting Your Vehicle in Gear

[DR05800(ALL)03/93] Your vehicle’s gearshift is on the steeringcolumn. You can put the gearshift in any one ofseveral positions.

[DR06001(ALL)06/95]


The positions of the column-mounted gearshift

*[DR06200(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Hold the brake pedal down while youmove the gearshift lever from position toposition. If you do not hold the brakepedal down, your vehicle may moveunexpectedly and injure someone.


187

*[DR06300(ALL)01/95] Once you place the gearshift securely intoposition, gradually release the brake pedal anduse the accelerator as necessary.

%*[DR06310(ALL)01/95] NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with abrake-shift interlock feature. Thisfeature prevents you from shiftingfrom P (Park) unless you have thebrake pedal depressed. (The ignitionmust be in the ON position.) If youcannot shift from P (Park) with thebrake pedal depressed:

*[DR06320(ALL)01/95] 1. Apply the parking brake.

*[DR06330(ALL)01/95] 2. Remove the key.

*[DR06340(ALL)08/95] 3. Insert the key and rotate it one positionclockwise (ignition in the OFF position).

*[DR06350(ALL)08/95] 4. Apply the brake pedal and shift to N(Neutral). (If the vehicle is shifted back to P[Park], you must repeat the previous steps.)

*[DR06360(ALL)01/95] 5. Start the vehicle.

*[DR06370(ALL)07/95] If you need to shift out of P (Park) by using thealternate procedure described above, it ispossible that a fuse has blown and that yourbrakelamps may also not be functional. Pleaserefer to the chapter titled Servicing Your Aerostarin this Owner Guide for instructions on checkingand replacing fuses.


DO NOT DRIVE YOUR VEHICLE UNTILYOU VERIFY THAT THE BRAKELAMPSARE WORKING.


188

%*[DR06401(ALL)01/95] R (Reverse)

*[DR06501(ALL)02/95] With the gearshift in the R (Reverse) position,the vehicle will move backward. You shouldalways come to a complete stop before shiftinginto or out of R (Reverse).

*[DR06520(ALL)01/95] N (Neutral)

[DR06550(ALL)08/95] In N (Neutral), the wheels of the vehicle are notlocked. Your vehicle will roll freely, even on theslightest incline, unless the parking brake orbrakes are on.

%*[DR06601(ALL)01/95] Driving

%*[DR06700(ALL)04/95] When to use j (Overdrive)

[DR06800(ALL)08/95] This is the normal driving position. As thevehicle picks up speed, automatic upshifts tosecond, third and fourth gears will occur whenj Overdrive is chosen on the selector and thetransmission control switch has not beenpressed. The transmission will shift into thecorrect gear when the right speed is achieved,for the accelerator pedal position you havechosen.

[DR06810(ALL)08/95] When to use Drive

[DR06830(ALL)08/95] You will note there is not a drive position onyour gearshift indicator. However, you will finda transmission control switch labeledOVERDRIVE OFF located on the end of thegearshift lever. Press this switch and theindicator light (OFF) illuminates on the gearshiftlever. With overdrive cancelled and the wordOFF illuminated, the transmission will operate ingears one through three. This is useful if youexperience frequent downshift/upshiftconditions, when operating with a heavy load orin hilly terrain, or if additional engine braking is


189

useful. However, shift back to j (Overdrive)whenever practical for optimum powertraincooling and fuel economy. This can beaccomplished by pushing the transmissioncontrol switch again, to cancel the OVERDRIVEOFF control and light.

[DR06850(ALL)06/95]


*[DR07100(ALL)01/95] When to use 2 (Second)

[DR07200(ALL)06/92] With the gearshift in the 2 (Second) gearposition more engine braking is provided. Use 2(Second) gear to drive up moderately steepgrades, to start up slippery roads, or to providemoderate engine braking on downgrades. DONOT GO FASTER THAN 55 mph (88 km/h) INTHIS GEARSHIFT POSITION.

*[DR07400(ALL)01/95] When to use 1 (Low)

[DR07500(ALL)06/92] With the gearshift in the 1 (First) gear positionmaximum engine braking is provided. Thisposition provides 1 (First) gear operation onlywith no automatic upshifts. To obtain upshiftsthe gearshift must be moved out of this position.Use 1 (First) gear to drive up steep grades, or toprovide maximum engine braking ondowngrades.


190

*[DR07600(ALL)01/95] P (Park)

[DR07700(ALL)06/92] Always come to a complete stop before you shiftinto P (Park). This position locks thetransmission and prevents the rear wheels fromturning.

[DR07800(ALL)06/92] To securely latch the gearshift in the P (Park)position, pull it toward you, push it completelycounterclockwise against the stop, and then pushit toward the instrument panel.


Always set the parking brake fully andmake sure the gearshift is securely latchedin P (Park).


Never leave your vehicle unattendedwhile it is running.

*[DR08500(ALL)06/94] Forced Downshifts

[DR08600(ALL)08/95] To gain acceleration in j (Overdrive) or Drive(j position with Overdrive cancelled) whenpassing another vehicle, push the accelerator tothe floor. The transmission will downshift to 2(Second) gear or to 1 (First) gear at calibratedspeeds.

*[DR11235(ALL)03/94] Power Braking

*[DR11275(ALL)03/94] Increasing the engine speed above idle withoutvehicle movement (such as holding the brake) ina forward or reverse gear causes transmissionstall.

*[DR11285(ALL)03/94] NOTE: Continued operation in the stallcondition can result in transmissionoverheat, malfunction or fluidexpulsion.


191

%*[DR15915(ALL)01/95] Steering Your Vehicle%*[DR15945(ALL)01/95] Your vehicle comes with power steering. Power

steering uses energy from the engine to helpsteer your vehicle.

%*[DR15950(ALL)04/95] If the amount of effort needed to steer yourvehicle changes at a constant vehicle speed, havethe power steering system checked. If the powersteering system breaks down (or if the engine isturned off), you can steer the vehicle manuallybut it takes more effort.

*[DR15960(ALL)01/95] Never hold the steering wheel to the extremeright or left for more than five seconds if theengine is running. This can damage the powersteering pump.

*[DR15985(ALL)05/90] NOTE: After any severe impact such asstriking large potholes, sliding intocurbs on icy roads, or a collisioninvolving the front end, observe thesteering wheel alignment. If the spokesof the steering wheel seem to be in adifferent position while going straightdown the road, have the frontsuspension and steering checked forpossible damage.

[DR16005(ALL)06/95] Electronic 4-Wheel Drive (E-4WD)(If equipped)

[DR16015(ALL)06/95] If your vehicle is equipped with the E-4WDoption, power is provided to all four wheelswhenever you press the accelerator pedal. Itimproves both handling and traction duringdifficult driving conditions, adjustingautomatically to your driving needs. Because theentire E-4WD system is controlled by amicroprocessor, your vehicle is not equippedwith the switch or shift lever used with mosttraditional 4WD vehicles. The microprocessordoes all the adjusting for you.


192

[DR16025(ALL)05/94] How the Electronic 4-Wheel Drive (E-4WD)System Works

[DR16036(ALL)03/90] Under normal driving conditions, when the roadis firm, dry and level, the engine power isdistributed one-third to the front axle andtwo-thirds to the rear axle. However, if a wheelbegins to slip, the microprocessor will sense thiscondition and signal the system to transmit morepower to the axle with more traction. (You mayfeel a momentary surge of power.)

[DR16046(ALL)06/95] NOTE: The microprocessor is disabled whenthe brakes are applied or when thetransmission selector is in the P (Park)or N (Neutral) positions.

[DR16055(ALL)05/94] Driving Your Electronic 4-Wheel Drive(E-4WD) Vehicle

[DR16065(ALL)03/95] Since your E-4WD vehicle is unique, follow thesesteps to be safe:

[DR16075(ALL)03/95] ❑Avoid unnecessary turns or other maneuversthat could cause loss of control and possibleinjury.

[DR16076(ALL)06/95] ❑Use the same size and type of tire and wheelas originally provided for your vehicle andinflate the tires to the manufacturer’srecommended air pressure.

[DR16077(ALL)03/95] ❑Become familiar with your vehicle’s operatingcharacteristics and study this Owner Guidefor specific operating instructions. Be sure alloccupants wear the safety belts provided.Drive cautiously, defensively, and at speedssafe for current road conditions.


193

[DR16095(ALL)06/95] ❑Do not let the added driving traction ofE-4WD lead you to believe that you can stopany quicker than a conventional two-wheeldrive vehicle. The added traction performancedoes not improve the braking ability of theE-4WD vehicle. Allow the same amount ofdistance when braking as with a two-wheeldrive vehicle.

[DR16096(ALL)06/95] RWARNING

Your E-4WD Aerostar is a passengervehicle designed for on-road use; it is notintended for any off-road use.


On-vehicle wheel balancing will causedamage to the drivetrain of E-4WDAerostars.

%*[DR21400(ALL)03/95] Brakes

*[DR21500(ALL)01/93] Front Disc Brakes

*[DR21600(ALL)06/95] The front disc brakes are self-adjusting. They donot require service other than periodic inspectionfor pad wear.

*[DR21900(ALL)10/94] Rear Drum Brakes

*[DR22000(ALL)08/95] The rear drum brakes are self-adjusting.Automatic adjustment occurs when the brakesare applied while “backing up.” If normaloperation does not include much backing, adjustthe brakes when they seem “low,” using theprocedure under If Brakes Do Not Grip Well orPedal is “Low” in this chapter.


194

*[DR22100(ALL)11/89] Hydraulic Power Brakes

*[DR22200(ALL)08/94] The hydraulic brake system is made up of twoindependent hydraulic circuits. One hydrauliccircuit supplies fluid to the front disc brakes andthe other hydraulic circuit supplies fluid to therear drum brakes. These two circuits aresupplied by a common hydraulic brake fluidreservoir, with a fluid level sensor.

*[DR22300(ALL)11/89] The brake light in the instrument cluster willlight for low brake fluid in the common brakefluid reservoir.


An increase in pedal travel will result inreduced braking capability. The brakesystem should be checked immediately.

%*[DR22500(ALL)10/94] Rear Anti-lock Brakes

[DR22700(ALL)06/95] Your vehicle is equipped with a rear Anti-lockBrake System (ABS). This system prevents atleast one and often both rear wheels fromcompletely locking up when the brakes areapplied in a panic stop, for example.

*[DR22800(ALL)07/94] Even with the Anti-lock Brake System, youshould be careful when braking. Front brakelock up on any surface, even on smoothpavement causes loss of steering control. Heavybraking on roads with loose surfaces such assnow or gravel, or severe pavement irregularitiescould also cause you to lose steering control ofyour vehicle.


195


If the anti-lock brake system warninglight remains on or comes on whiledriving, have the braking system checkedby a qualified service technician as soonas possible.

*[DR22910(ALL)07/95] NOTE: If a fault occurs in the anti-locksystem, and the brake warning light isnot lit, the anti-lock system is disabledbut normal brake function remainsoperational.

%*[DR23000(ALL)12/89] If Brakes Do Not Grip Well or Pedal is“Low”

%*[DR23200(ALL)07/95] If brakes do not grip well, it may indicate therear drum brakes need adjustment. To do this,drive the vehicle in reverse at 5 mph (8 km/h)on level, dry pavement. Stop the vehicle byfirmly applying the brakes. Repeat thisprocedure four or five times.

*[DR23250(ALL)11/89] If during normal operation the brake pedalseems “low”, it may indicate the need for abrake system inspection and/or service. Youshould have your brakes checked as soon aspossible.

%*[DR23300(ALL)07/95] Occasional brake squeal during light to moderatestops does not affect the function of the brakesystem and is normal. However, if the squealbecomes louder or more frequent, have yourbrakes inspected by your dealer or a qualifiedservice technician.


196


Modifications to the suspension springrates and/or vehicle ride height mayadversely affect vehicle stopping ability.

*[DR23500(ALL)07/92] If Brakes Pull

*[DR23600(ALL)05/95] ❑Check tire pressure.

*[DR23700(ALL)07/95] ❑Perform the self-adjustment proceduredescribed under If Brakes Do Not Grip Well orPedal is “Low.”

*[DR23800(ALL)05/95] If pull occurs during the first 500 miles(800 km), make 10 moderately fast stops from40 mph (65 km/h) and then perform theself-adjustment procedure above. It may benecessary to repeat this operation to properlyseat new brake linings and pads.

%*[DR24000(ALL)01/93] Stopping Distances

*[DR24100(ALL)11/89] Stopping distances vary with different loads anddriving conditions. Use caution whenencountering new conditions and acquaintyourself with vehicle performance. Take fulladvantage of engine braking power whenslowing down.

%*[DR24200(ALL)01/95] Applying the Brakes

*[DR24300(ALL)05/95] Apply the brake pedal gradually. Use the“squeeze” technique — push on the brake pedalwith a steadily increasing force. This allows thewheels to continue to roll while you are slowingdown, which lets you steer properly.

*[DR24500(ALL)05/95] NOTE: If you are driving down a long orsteep hill, shift to a lower gear and donot apply your brakes continuously. Ifyou apply your brakes continuously,they may overheat and become lesseffective.


197

%*[DR24600(ALL)03/95] Parking Brake

*[DR24650(ALL)01/95] The parking brake should be used whenever youpark your vehicle.

[DR24700(ALL)01/89] The parking brake is a hand operated leverlocated on the floor of your van just to the rightof the driver’s seat.

[DR24750(ALL)12/91] To set the parking brake while parking yourvan, press the brake pedal with your right footand hold it while you fully apply the parkingbrake lever.

[DR24900(ALL)08/95] To release the parking brake, press the brakepedal with your right foot, depress the releasebutton in the parking brake lever while pullingup on the lever, and then lower the lever all theway to the floor.

[DR24910(ALL)11/89]


Parking Brake


Always set the parking brake fully andmake sure the gearshift is latched in P(Park). Turn off the ignition whenever youleave your vehicle.


198


If the parking brake is fully released, butthe Brake System light remains on, havethe brakes checked immediately. Theymay not be working properly.

*[DR25100(ALL)06/95] The parking brake is not designed to stop amoving vehicle, but you can use the parkingbrake to stop your vehicle in an emergency ifthe normal brakes fail. However, since theparking brake applies only the rear brakes, thestopping distance will increase greatly and thehandling of your vehicle will be adverselyaffected.

%*[DR25200(ALL)01/95] Driving Under Special Conditions%*[DR25250(ALL)01/95] Tips for Safe Driving

*[DR25301(ALL)07/95] As with any new vehicle, yours may drive andhandle differently from your previous vehicle.Use care until you become accustomed to itsvarious features and driving characteristics.

*[DR25350(ALL)03/95] Operate your vehicle within reasonable limits.Sudden acceleration, deceleration, turning, orcombinations of these maneuvers can cause avehicle to behave differently than anticipated.

*[DR25401(ALL)02/95] ❑Extreme braking can cause the front wheelsto lock and slide, making it difficult tocontrol the direction of the vehicle. Use a“squeeze” technique — push on the brakepedal with steadily increasing force. Thisallows the wheels to brake yet continue toroll so that you may steer in the directionyou want to travel. If you lock the wheels,release the brake pedal and repeat the“squeeze” technique.


199

*[DR25450(ALL)02/95] ❑Abruptly releasing the accelerator or brakinghard when your vehicle is in a severe curveat a speed which is high in relationship to theseverity of the curve (and other factors likeroad, weather, and tire conditions) may causethe vehicle to change its direction of travel. Ifpossible, avoid application of the brakes. Ifbraking is necessary, it should be done byusing the “squeeze” technique describedearlier.

*[DR25475(ALL)08/95] If you run off the road, do not turn the steeringwheel sharply to return to the road. Instead,slow the vehicle sufficiently and gradually steerthe vehicle back onto the road.

*[DR25501(ALL)02/95] Wheel Spin

*[DR25550(ALL)11/92] ❑Extreme acceleration can cause the rearwheels to spin, perhaps resulting in reducedsteering control.

[DR25601(ALL)08/95] If the wheels spin during vehicle start-up, shiftto second gear.

*[DR26301(ALL)01/89] Move forward slowly and evenly. If this doesnot work, try rocking the vehicle.

%*[DR26550(ALL)05/90] High Speed Driving

*[DR26590(ALL)07/95] Ford Motor Company recommends obeyingposted speed limits.


Driving too fast for conditions creates thepossibility of loss of vehicle control.Driving at very high speeds for extendedperiods of time may result in damage tovehicle components.


200

*[DR26625(ALL)12/91] Speed limiter

*[DR26652(ALL)05/95] All models are equipped with an ElectronicEngine Control (EEC) system which limits themaximum engine speed and thus road speed intop gear. Vehicle operation is normal since thecontrolled maximum speed is above postedhighway speeds in North America.

%*[DR26701(ALL)01/95] Driving in Bad Weather

%*[DR26750(ALL)01/95] Slippery roads

*[DR26801(ALL)03/95] Drive cautiously on wet or snowy roads:

*[DR26850(ALL)03/95] ❑Do not quickly move the steering wheelunless necessary.

*[DR26901(ALL)01/95] ❑Drive slower than you normally would.

*[DR26951(ALL)01/95] ❑Give your vehicle more distance to stop.

[DR27025(ALL)08/95] ❑To stop on ice, shift to N (Neutral) below 10mph (16 km/h) and gently pump brakes(except with rear anti-lock brakes).

*[DR27050(ALL)02/93] ❑Consider using one of the lower gears.


To avoid skidding and losing control onslippery roads, do not downshift into 1(First) when you are moving faster than20 mph (30 km/h).


The Anti-Lock Brake System may notprevent brake lock-up on extremelyslippery surfaces.


201

%*[DR27450(ALL)03/95] Traction-Lok Rear Axle (If equipped)

*[DR27501(ALL)03/95] This axle provides added drive away traction onslippery surfaces, particularly when one or morewheels are on a surface with poor traction.

*[DR27550(ALL)03/93] Extended use of other than matching size tireson a Traction-Lok rear axle could result in apermanent reduction in effectiveness. This loss ofeffectiveness does not affect normal driving andshould not be noticeable to the driver.

%*[DR27651(ALL)01/95] High water

*[DR27675(ALL)06/92] Never attempt to cross water that is fast flowingor of unknown depth.

*[DR27701(ALL)05/90] Do not drive through flooded areas unless youare sure that the water is below the bottom ofthe wheel hubs.

*[DR27750(ALL)04/94] If you must drive through high water, driveslowly. You may have limited traction or wetbrakes, so allow extra stopping distance becauseyour vehicle will not stop as quickly as usual.

*[DR27801(ALL)01/95] After you drive through the standing water,apply your brakes gently several times as yourvehicle moves slowly. This helps to dry thebrakes.

*[DR27820(ALL)06/95] NOTE: If the transmission and transfer case issubmerged in water, their fluids shouldbe checked and changed, if necessary.

*[DR27825(ALL)03/93] NOTE: All rear axle lube quantities must bereplaced every 100,000 miles(160,000 km) or if the axle has beensubmerged in water. Otherwise, thelube should not be checked or changedunless a leak is suspected or repairrequired.


202

*[DR27850(ALL)11/89] Rocking the vehicle

*[DR27950(ALL)05/95] If your vehicle gets stuck (for example, in mudor snow), you may rock it out of the spot. Shiftin a steady rhythm between forward and reversegears. Allow the transmission to fully engage,then press lightly on the accelerator. Do not rockthe vehicle for more than a few minutes. Thismay overheat the engine and transmission,causing damage to both. In addition, othervehicle systems and components may also bedamaged.


Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph(55 km/h). The tires may fail and injure apassenger or bystander.

%*[DR28050(ALL)03/95] Driving With a Heavy Load

*[DR28101(ALL)01/95] There are limits to the amount of weight yourvehicle can carry or tow. The total weight ofyour vehicle, plus the weight of the passengersand cargo, should never be more than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). Also, the weightthat your vehicle carries over the front axle andrear axle should never be more than the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the respectiveaxle.

*[DR28150(ALL)08/95] The weight limits of your vehicle’s tires affectthe GVWR or GAWR limitations. Usage ofreplacement tires with higher weight limits thanoriginals does not increase GVWR or GAWR.Usage of lower capacity replacement tires maylower GVWR and GAWR limitations.


203


If the GVWR or the GAWR specified onthe Safety Compliance Certification Labelis exceeded, your vehicle may be damagedor you may lose control and injuresomeone.

*[DR28750(ALL)01/93] Vehicle/Trailer Loads

*[DR28801(ALL)06/92] All vehicles may tow a Class I trailer providedthe Gross Combined Weight (GCW) is less thanor equal to the GVWR shown on the SafetyCompliance Certification Label. For heaviertrailer applications, refer to the towinginformation found later in this chapter.

*[DR29001(ALL)03/91] Towing a trailer puts additional loads on yourvehicle’s engine, transmission, axle, brakes, tiresand suspension. For your safety and for thegood of your vehicle, use the right equipmentfor the type of trailer you tow.

*[DR29025(ALL)09/92] Your trailer towing capability will vary based onthe standard and optional equipment on yourvehicle. Refer to the following VehicleLoading/Towing Information and the TrailerTowing Tables to determine the specific towingcapability of your vehicle.

*[DR29050(ALL)02/92] ❑Stay within the load limits when you tow.

*[DR29101(ALL)01/95] ❑Carefully and thoroughly prepare yourvehicle for towing, making sure to use theright equipment and to attach it properly.(See Preparing to Tow in this chapter.)


204

*[DR29151(ALL)01/95] ❑Use extra caution when driving your vehiclewhile you tow. (See Driving while you tow inthis chapter.)

*[DR29201(ALL)01/95] ❑Service your vehicle more frequently if youtow a trailer. (See Servicing your vehicle if youtow in this chapter.)

[DR29250(ALL)03/90] Standard length vehicles adapted for trailer towmay require relocation of the underbody sparetire. It is recommended that you secure the tireunder the rear-most seat using the hold-downhardware located with the jack.

[DR29301(ALL)03/91]


Spare tire stowage (standard length model)

*[DR29350(ALL)05/94] Do not tow a trailer until your vehicle has beendriven at least 500 miles (800 km).


205

%*[DR29401(ALL)06/92] Vehicle Loading/TowingInformation

*[DR29450(ALL)03/91] Your vehicle’s load capacity is designated byweight, not volume, so you cannot necessarilyuse all available space with large or heavy loads.Maximum safe vehicle weights as well as tire,rim sizes and inflation pressures are specified foryour vehicle at the assembly plant on the SafetyCompliance Certification Label. The CertificationLabel is located on the left front door lock facingor the door latch post pillar.

*[DR29501(ALL)12/91] Trucks, unlike passenger cars, are basicallycustom vehicles designed to carry a load. Mostowners start with a base vehicle and addproduction and dealer installed and/oraftermarket components to suit their tastes andpurposes. Even trucks that are purchased forpersonal transportation only are likely to haveconsiderable optional equipment, such as stepbumpers and light bars, for example.


It is extremely dangerous to ride in acargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.In a collision, people riding in these areasare more likely to be seriously injured orkilled.


206


Do not allow people to ride in any area ofthe vehicle that is not equipped with seatsand safety belts.


Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in aseat and using a safety belt properly.


Cargo should always be secured toprevent it from shifting and causingdamage to the vehicle or harm topassengers.

*[DR29551(ALL)03/91] Each additional item of equipment affects howmuch cargo a vehicle can carry. If a vehicle isoverloaded, performance will suffer and serviceconcerns may arise.


207

*[DR29601(ALL)04/95] The following is a typical example of a SafetyCompliance Certification Label and anexplanation of how this information should beused:

[DR29650(ALL)05/94]

half page art:0020148-G

Safety Compliance Certification Label

*[DR29950(ALL)06/92] Do not use the sample numbers on the SafetyCompliance Certification Label shown. Use theactual numbers from your vehicle certificationlabel.

*[DR30001(ALL)06/92] Understanding Loading/TowingInformation

*[DR30050(ALL)03/94] The following terms are used to describe theability to carry or tow a load:

*[DR30101(ALL)01/93] ❑Base Curb Weight

*[DR30150(ALL)01/93] ❑Payload

*[DR30200(ALL)01/93] ❑GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)

*[DR30250(ALL)01/93] ❑GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)


208

*[DR30301(ALL)01/93] ❑GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)

[DR30305(ALL)08/95] ❑GAWR F (Gross Axle Weight Rating Front)

[DR30307(ALL)08/95] ❑GAWR R (Gross Axle Weight Rating Rear)

*[DR30310(ALL)06/92] ❑GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating)

*[DR30320(ALL)06/92] ❑Maximum Trailer Weight Rating

*[DR30330(ALL)06/92] ❑Maximum Trailer Weight

*[DR30340(ALL)06/92] ❑Trailer Weight Range

*[DR30351(ALL)03/91] Base Curb Weight

*[DR30401(ALL)03/94] The Base Curb Weight is the weight of thevehicle including fuel, coolants, lubricants,emergency tools, spare wheel and tire. It alsoincludes any equipment that is standard on thatmodel. It does not include passengers, cargo oroptional equipment installed by factory, dealer,aftermarket supplier or customer.

*[DR30451(ALL)03/91] Payload

*[DR30501(ALL)03/91] Payload is the combined, maximum allowableweight of cargo, occupants and optionalequipment that the truck is designed to carry. Itis Gross Vehicle Weight Rating minus the basecurb weight.

*[DR30550(ALL)03/91] Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)

*[DR30650(ALL)08/95] It is important to remember that GVW is not alimit or a specification. If an owner loads up avehicle and weighs it, that’s the GVW at thatmoment. If the owner piles on more of a loadand weighs it again, that becomes the GVW.


209

%*[DR30701(ALL)03/91] Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

*[DR30750(ALL)10/94] To avoid overloading a vehicle, the ownershould observe the manufacturer’s specifiedGross Vehicle Weight Rating. The GVWR is themaximum total weight of base vehicle,passengers, optional components and cargo thata particular vehicle was designed to carry.

%*[DR30801(ALL)01/93] Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

*[DR30850(ALL)03/91] We have all seen a car or a truck that is loadeddown in the rear and riding high in the front.This is a dangerous condition that usually meansthat the rear suspension components are undersevere strain and that vehicle handling isimpaired. There is more to carrying a load thanjust payload or GVWR.

*[DR30901(ALL)03/91] Your Safety Compliance Certification Label notonly gives the GVWR, it also gives the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR) which is thecarrying capacity for each axle system. Fortrucks, the rear axle will be designed to carrymore weight than the front.

*[DR30950(ALL)06/92] The rating is based on the carrying capacity ofthe lowest rated axle and suspension componentas well as other factors. This is why it’s soimportant to observe vehicle loading ratings.Overloading a vehicle punishes components andcan lead to shortened service life or outrightfailure.

*[DR31001(ALL)06/92] The capacity of the tires is included as part ofthe axle and suspension system, which is to beconsidered when determining the lowest ratedcomponent. Tires are rated to carry a specificmaximum load at a specific maximum tirepressure.


210

*[DR31050(ALL)06/92] Passenger car type tires when installed on lighttrucks and multipurpose passenger vehicles arerated at 10% lower load carrying capacity due tothe differences in vehicle usages.

*[DR31101(ALL)05/95] The vehicle must not be loaded to both the frontand rear GAWR because the GVWR will beexceeded. The GAWR of the front and rear axlesexceeds the GVWR when added together toallow flexibility in fore and aft loading of cargo.

*[DR31110(ALL)06/92] With the tires inflated to the specified pressurethe total weight of your vehicle must not exceedthe GVWR and GAWR specified on the SafetyCompliance Certification Label. This includes fullfuel tank(s), vehicle equipment, and occupants aswell as the cargo load.

*[DR31120(ALL)06/92] GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating)

*[DR31130(ALL)06/92] GCWR is the maximum combined weight of thetowing vehicle (including passengers and cargo)and the loaded trailer. The GCWR is specifiedby the manufacturer to indicate the combinedmaximum loaded weight that the vehicle isdesigned to tow.

*[DR31140(ALL)06/92] Maximum Trailer Weight Rating

*[DR31150(ALL)05/95] The maximum trailer weight rating is themaximum weight of a trailer the vehicle ispermitted to tow. It is specified by themanufacturer and is determined by subtractingthe vehicle curb weight for eachengine/transmission combination, any requiredoption weight for trailer towing and the weightof the driver from the GCWR for the towingvehicle.


211

*[DR31160(ALL)06/92] Maximum Trailer Weight

*[DR31170(ALL)05/95] The maximum trailer weight is the maximumweight of a trailer the loaded vehicle ispermitted to tow. It is determined by subtractingthe weight of the loaded towingvehicle (including passengers and cargo) fromthe GCWR for the towing vehicle.

*[DR31180(ALL)06/92] Trailer Weight Range

*[DR31190(ALL)06/92] The trailer weight range is a specified range byweight, which the trailer must fall within,ranging from zero to the maximum trailerweight rating.

%*[DR31301(ALL)03/91] Calculating The Load

*[DR31350(ALL)03/91] To know how much weight your vehicle cancarry:

*[DR31401(ALL)12/91] ❑Obtain ratings from your Safety ComplianceCertification Label, and the Trailer towingspecifications in the owner guide (refer to theIndex)

*[DR31450(ALL)07/95] — Refer to the following sample illustrationto locate the various ratings on yourSafety Compliance Certification Label.

*[DR31501(ALL)03/91] — If you do not plan on pulling a trailer, donot include these ratings into yourcalculations.

*[DR31550(ALL)08/95] ❑Weigh your vehicle as you customarilyoperate the vehicle (without cargo).

*[DR31601(ALL)03/91] ❑Subtract the total weight of passengers, driverand optional equipment added by the factory,dealer or aftermarket supplier to determinehow much cargo weight you can carry.


212

*[DR31702(ALL)03/91] If you suspect that your payload is excessive,have your vehicle weighed at a highway weighstation or appropriate commercial facility. Weighthe total vehicle and trailer (if applicable), thenseparately weigh the vehicle at the front andrear wheels. And finally, weigh the trailerseparately if applicable.

*[DR31751(ALL)03/91] Use this chart to perform your calculations.

[DR31805(ALL)03/95]

twenty-six pica chart:0021098-B


213

*[DR31851(ALL)03/91] NOTE: The Truck Safety ComplianceCertification Label has two weightrelated entries that sometimes causeconfusion.

*[DR31901(ALL)08/95] Front Axle Reserve Capacity in Pounds (kgs): Ifthis value is given as 83 pounds (38 kgs) on thelabel, does this mean that you are limited toadding only 83 pounds (38 kgs) of accessories tothe front end capacity? Not exactly. This saysthat you can load 83 pounds (38 kgs) of optionson the front axle, add 150 pound (68 kgs)passengers to all seating positions, and addevenly distributed cargo in the box withoutexceeding the GAWR F.

*[DR31950(ALL)06/92] It is possible to hang heavier equipment on thefront as long as the vehicle owner/operatorcompensates. This can be accomplished, ifnecessary, by carrying fewer passengers, lesscargo or positioning cargo more toward the rear,which has the effect of reducing the load on thefront. Keep in mind that the GAWR F, GAWRR, nor the GVWR should ever be exceeded.

*[DR32001(ALL)08/95] Total Accessory Reserve Capacity in Pounds(kgs): If, for example, this value is given as 112pounds (51 kgs), does this mean that you arelimited to adding 112 pounds (51 kgs) ofaccessories to your vehicle? Not exactly. This is anumber that is related to government crash teststandards, and only indirectly reflects on theamount of accessory weight that can be carried.

*[DR32050(ALL)06/94] In the case of both these numbers (83 and 112pounds) (38 and 51 kgs), the important thing toremember is that for safe operation, anowner/operator should calculate the amount andthe distribution of all weights (passengers,accessory equipment and cargo). These combinedweights should fall below the vehicle’s GVWRand GAWR.


214

*[DR32201(ALL)01/93] Trailers

*[DR32251(ALL)10/94] Towing a trailer safely means having the properweight on the tongue (usually 10% of the trailerweight). Load-equalizing hitches on large rigsmay transfer weight to each of the vehicle’saxles. This weight must be included in capacitycalculations when determining if the vehicle isloaded within safe limits.

*[DR32301(ALL)01/95] If your vehicle exceeds the GVWR, remove cargofrom your vehicle accordingly. If your vehicleexceeds the GAWR for either axle, shift the loador remove cargo accordingly.


If the GVWR or the GAWR specified onthe Safety Compliance Certification Labelis exceeded, your vehicle may be damagedor you may lose control and injuresomeone.


Towing trailers beyond the maximumrecommended gross trailer weight couldresult in engine damage, transmission/axledamage, structural damage, loss of control,and personal injury.

*[DR32450(ALL)05/95] Use the Safety Compliance Certification Label tofind the axle code number and the engine typefor your vehicle.

*[DR32500(ALL)03/91] Use the appropriate Maximum Gross CombinedWeight Rating (GCWR) chart to find theMaximum GCWR for your type engine and rearaxle ratio.

*[DR32551(ALL)03/91] Subtract your Loaded Vehicle Weight from theMaximum GCWR found in the chart. This is themaximum trailer weight your vehicle can towand must fall below the maximum shown underTrailer Weight on the chart.


215

[DR33400(ALL)08/95]



216

[DR33500(ALL)12/91]

twelve pica chart:0020157-D


217

*[DR33645(ALL)06/94] Automatic Transmissions

[DR33650(ALL)08/95]

thirty-four pica chart:0095069-A


218

*[DR36500(ALL)01/95] Preparing to Tow

*[DR36550(ALL)01/95] For your safety and for the good of yourvehicle, use the right equipment for the type oftrailer you tow. Also, make sure that all towingequipment is properly attached to your vehicle.If you are not certain that you are using theright equipment in the proper manner, see yourFord or Lincoln-Mercury dealer.

[DR36560(ALL)03/91] Under certain circumstances, the trailer frontalarea is not to exceed the base vehicle frontalarea, no matter what size engine your vehiclehas:

[DR36570(ALL)03/91] ❑ If you drive on roads with steep grades or onroads with moderate grades that are 5 miles(8 km) or longer.

[DR36580(ALL)03/91] ❑ If outside temperature in which you travel isabove 100˚F (38˚C).

%*[DR36600(ALL)01/93] Hitches

*[DR36650(ALL)01/95] For towing trailers up to 2,000 lb (907 kg), use aweight carrying hitch and ball which uniformlydistributes the trailer tongue loads through theunderbody structure. Use a frame-mountedweight distributing hitch for trailers over 2,000lb (907 kg).

*[DR36800(ALL)12/91] Do not install a single or multi-clamp typebumper hitch, or a hitch which attaches to theaxle. Underbody mounted hitches are acceptableif installed properly. Follow towing instructionsof a reputable rental agency.

*[DR37000(ALL)12/92] Whenever a trailer hitch and hardware areremoved, make sure all mounting holes in theunderbody are properly sealed to preventnoxious gases or water from entering.


219

%*[DR37800(ALL)07/95] Safety Chains

*[DR37900(ALL)12/92] Always use safety chains between your vehicleand trailer. Cross chains under the trailer tongueand allow slack for turning corners. Connectsafety chains to the vehicle frame or hookretainers. Never attach chains to the bumper.

%*[DR38000(ALL)08/95] Trailer Brakes

*[DR38100(ALL)03/95] Separate trailer brakes are required on mosttowed vehicles weighing over 1,500 lb (680 kg).


Do not connect a trailer’s hydraulic brakesystem directly to your vehicle’s brakesystem. Your vehicle may not haveenough braking power and your chancesof having a collision greatly increase.

%*[DR38300(ALL)06/95] Trailer Lamps

*[DR38400(ALL)11/89] Make sure your trailer lamps conform to Federaland local regulations.

*[DR38425(ALL)03/91] Class I and Class II Trailer Tow electrical wiringprovides two circuits (right hand and left hand)to operate trailer stop/turn tail lamps. Eachstop/turn circuit will operate one combinationstop/turn light bulb (# 1157, 3157, 2357, or 3357)on the trailer. Never add more than one trailerlight bulb to one circuit.


Always replace a fuse with one that hasthe specified amperage rating. Using afuse with a higher amperage rating cancause severe wire damage and could starta fire.


220

*[DR38500(ALL)06/95] Driving while you tow

*[DR38520(ALL)05/95] Be especially careful when driving while youtow a trailer. Never drive faster than 45 mph(70 km/h) when you tow in hilly country onhot days. Also, anticipate stops so that you canbrake gradually.

%*[DR38540(ALL)01/95] If you use the speed control while you aretowing on very long, steep grades, the speedcontrol may shut off.

[DR38600(ALL)08/95] When towing a trailer in hilly terrain, with avehicle equipped with an automatic overdrivetransmission, you may wish to operate in Drive(by cancelling Overdrive with OVERDRIVE OFFbutton) rather than k (Overdrive). This willeliminate excessive downshifting and upshiftingto maintain speed. Switch back to Overdrivewhenever practical for optimum powertraincooling. This can be accomplished by pushing inthe switch located on the end of the indicatorlever.

*[DR38800(ALL)06/95] When descending a steep grade with a trailer,operate in Drive rather than Overdrive. Ifadditional braking is needed, shift the automatictransmission gearshift into 2 (Second) gear or 1(Low).

[DR38925(ALL)08/95] Servicing your vehicle if you tow

*[DR38950(ALL)08/93] If you tow a trailer for a long distance, yourvehicle will need to be serviced more frequentlythan usual. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule andRecord booklet for additional information.


221

*[DR39000(ALL)08/95] Trailer Towing Tips

*[DR39100(ALL)11/89] Before starting on a trip, practice turning,stopping and backing in an area away fromheavy traffic. Get to know the “feel” of thevehicle/trailer combination.

*[DR39200(ALL)05/90] Practice backing up. Back up very slowly, withsomeone outside at the rear of your trailer toguide you. Place your hand at the bottom of thesteering wheel and move it in the direction youwant the rear of the trailer to swing. Slightmovement of the steering wheel results in amuch larger movement of the rear of the trailer.

*[DR39300(ALL)11/89] Allow more room for stopping with a trailerattached. Trailer brakes should be applied first,whether manually or automatically controlled,when approaching a stop.

*[DR39400(ALL)11/89] For a good handling truck-trailer combination,the trailer tongue load should be approximately10-15% of the loaded trailer weight.

*[DR39500(ALL)05/95] Make a thorough check of your equipmentbefore starting out on the road. After you havetraveled about 50 miles (80 km) stop in aprotected area and double-check your hitch andelectrical connections. Also check trailer wheellug nuts for tightness.


222

*[DR39600(ALL)11/89] When turning, drive slightly beyond the normalturning point so the trailer wheels will clearcurbs or other obstructions.

*[DR39725(ALL)03/95] When stopped in traffic for long periods of timein hot weather, place the gearshift selector leverin P (PARK) to increase the engine idle speed.This aids in engine cooling and air conditionerefficiency. If the engine overheats, move thefunction selector knob to VENT to stop thecompressor and increase the engine speed for ashort time.


Do not tow a trailer when using atemporary spare tire.

*[DR39900(ALL)05/90] Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on agrade. However, if you must park on a grade,place wheel chocks under the trailer’s wheels asfollows:

*[DR40000(ALL)05/95] ❑Apply the brake pedal and hold.

*[DR40100(ALL)11/89] ❑Have another person place the wheel chocksunder the trailer wheels.

*[DR40200(ALL)08/95] ❑With the chocks in place, release the brakepedal, making sure the chocks are holding.

[DR40350(ALL)08/95] ❑Apply the parking brake by pressing thebrake pedal down firmly with your right footwhile applying the parking brake with yourright hand.

*[DR40575(ALL)06/95] ❑Shift the gearshift lever into P (Park).


223

*[DR40600(ALL)01/93] To start, after being parked on a grade:

*[DR40700(ALL)05/95] ❑Apply the brake pedal and hold.

*[DR40800(ALL)08/95] ❑Start the engine.

*[DR40900(ALL)08/95] ❑Shift transmission into gear and release theparking brake.

*[DR41000(ALL)08/95] ❑Release the brake pedal and move the vehicleuphill to free the wheel chocks.

*[DR41100(ALL)05/95] ❑Apply the brake pedal and hold whileanother person retrieves the chocks.

[DR41200(ALL)08/95] Luggage Rack (If equipped)

[DR41300(ALL)08/95] Always distribute your luggage load evenly. Donot load more than 100 pounds (45 kg) ontorack or cause the vehicle to exceed the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).

[DR41400(ALL)08/95] The crossbars and cross slats are adjustable.Loosen the adjustment screws, slide the bars andslats as necessary, and retighten the screws.


Be sure that items on the roof rack aresecurely fastened.

[DR41600(ALL)08/95] Use caution to avoid scratching the paint. Drivecarefully and avoid sudden starts and stops.


225

Roadside Emergencies

%*[RE00400(ALL)03/95] Jump-Starting Your Vehicle

*[RE00500(ALL)08/95] Your vehicle’s battery may die if you leave thelights on or any electrical equipment on afteryou turn the engine off. If this happens, youmay be able to jump-start your vehicle with abooster battery.

*[RE00600(ALL)02/95] RWARNING

The gases around the battery can explodeif exposed to flames, sparks, or litcigarettes. An explosion could result ininjury or vehicle damage.


To protect yourself when charging abattery, always shield your face and eyes.Make sure that you can breathe fresh air.

%*[RE00800(ALL)06/95] RWARNING

Applying too much pressure on the endswhen lifting a battery could cause acid tospill. Lift the battery with a carrier orwith your hands on the opposite corners.

%*[RE00900(ALL)07/95] RWARNING

Batteries contain sulfuric acid which burnsskin, eyes, and clothing.

File:12cprea.exUpdate:Tue Aug 29 17:46:27 1995

226

*[RE00910(ALL)07/95] If the acid touches someone’s skin, eyes, orclothing, immediately flush the area with waterfor at least 15 minutes. If someone swallows theacid, have him or her drink lots of milk or waterfirst, then Milk of Magnesia, a beaten egg, orvegetable oil. Call a doctor immediately.


Do not push-start your vehicle. You coulddamage the catalytic converter. For furtherinformation, see Jumper Cables in theIndex.

*[RE01000(ALL)03/95] To avoid damaging your vehicle or your battery,and to avoid injury to yourself, follow thesedirections for preparing your vehicle tojump-start and connecting the jumper cables inthe order they are given. If in doubt, call forroad service.

*[RE01100(ALL)03/95] Preparing Your Vehicle

*[RE01200(ALL)03/95] 1. Your vehicle has a 12-volt starting system, soyou need to use a 12-volt jumper system.You will damage your starting motor,ignition system, and other electrical parts ifyou connect them to a 24-volt power supply(either two 12-volt batteries in series or a24-volt generator set).

*[RE01300(ALL)03/95] 2. Do not disconnect the battery of the disabledvehicle. You could damage the vehicle’selectrical system.

*[RE01400(ALL)04/95] 3. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood ofthe disabled vehicle. Make sure the vehiclesdo not touch each other. Set the parkingbrake on both vehicles and stay clear of theengine cooling fan and other moving parts.


227

*[RE01500(ALL)03/95] 4. Check all battery terminals and remove anyexcessive corrosion before you attach thejumper cables.

[RE01600(ALL)08/95] 5. Turn on the heater fan in both vehicles. Turnthe function selector knob to the Vposition. Turn off all other switches andgauges.

%*[RE01700(ALL)05/95] Connecting the jumper cables

*[RE01800(ALL)03/95] 1. Connect one end of the first jumper cable tothe positive (+) terminal of the dischargedbattery. (You can connect either jumper cableto the positive (+) terminal, as long as youuse the same cable for both positiveterminals.) Most jumper cables have a redcable and a black cable. The red cable isgenerally used for the positive terminals andthe black for the negative ones.

*[RE01900(ALL)04/95] 2. Connect the other end of the first cable tothe positive (+) terminal of the boosterbattery.

*[RE02000(ALL)07/95] 3. Connect one end of the second cable to thenegative (S) terminal of the booster battery— NOT to the discharged battery.

*[RE02100(ALL)03/95] 4. Connect the other end of that cable to agood metallic surface on the engine or frameof the disabled vehicle. The followingillustration shows where you can find ametallic surface.


Do not connect the end of the secondcable to the negative (S) terminal of thebattery to be jumped. A spark may causean explosion of the gases that surroundthe battery.


228

[RE02300(ALL)08/95]


Attaching jumper cables

*[RE02500(ALL)03/95] Jump-Starting

*[RE02600(ALL)03/95] 1. Make sure that the jumper cables are not inthe way of moving engine parts, then startthe booster vehicle. Run the engine at amoderate speed.

*[RE02700(ALL)03/95] 2. Let the discharged battery charge for a fewminutes and then start the disabled vehicle.It may take a couple of tries before thevehicle starts. If the vehicle does not startafter several attempts, there may be adifferent problem.

*[RE02800(ALL)03/95] 3. When both vehicles are running, let themidle for a few minutes to charge thedischarged battery.

%*[RE02900(ALL)03/95] Removing jumper cables

*[RE03000(ALL)03/95] 1. Always remove the jumper cables in thereverse order. Remove the negative (S) endof the jumper cable from the metallic surfaceon the engine or frame of the disabledvehicle.

*[RE03100(ALL)06/95] 2. Remove the negative (S) cable from thebooster battery.


229

*[RE03200(ALL)06/95] 3. Remove the positive (+) cable from thebooster battery.

*[RE03400(ALL)05/95] 4. Remove the other end of the positive (+)cable from the discharged battery.

*[RE03500(ALL)04/95] After the vehicle is started, let it idle for a whileto let the engine “relearn” its idle conditions.Drive it around for a while with all electricalaccessories turned off to let the battery recharge.You may need to use a battery charger to fullyrecharge the battery.

*[RE03550(ALL)03/95] If you need to replace your battery, see Batteryin the Servicing Your Vehicle chapter.

%*[RE03600(ALL)03/95] Changing a Tire

*[RE03700(ALL)01/95] If you get a flat tire while you are driving, donot apply the brake heavily. Instead, graduallydecrease the speed. Hold the steering wheelfirmly and slowly move to a safe place on theside of the road. Park on a level spot, turn offthe ignition, set the parking brake, and turn onthe hazard flashers.

%*[RE03800(ALL)03/95] The Conventional Spare Tire

*[RE03900(ALL)01/95] If you have the conventional spare tire, you canuse it as a spare or as a regular tire. This sparetire is identical to the other tires that come withyour vehicle, although the wheel may not match.

%*[RE04000(ALL)03/95] The Temporary Spare Tire

*[RE04100(ALL)03/95] You may have a high pressure temporary sparetire. This spare tire is smaller than a regular tireand is designed for emergency use only. Use itonly when you get a flat tire and replace it assoon as you can. This spare tire is marked withthe words “TEMPORARY USE ONLY” so thatyou can easily identify it.


230


If you use the temporary spare tirecontinuously or do not follow theseprecautions, the tire could fail, causingyou to lose control of the vehicle, possiblyinjuring yourself or others.

[RE04250(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

The tire size on the E-4WD must bemaintained.

[RE04260(ALL)06/95] Your vehicle may have a full diameter minispare or a full size tire. This full diameter minispare is special for the E-4WD and another minispare from another vehicle can not besubstituted without the possibility of damage toyour vehicle. All tires should be inflated to themanufacturer’s recommended pressures.


To avoid injury, never run the enginewith one wheel off the ground, such aswhen changing a tire.

*[RE04280(ALL)10/94] Extended use of other than matching size sparetires on a Traction-Lok axle could result in apermanent reduction in effectiveness. This loss ofeffectiveness does not affect normal driving andshould not be noticeable to the driver.


231

*[RE04300(ALL)01/95] When you drive with the temporary spare tire,DO NOT:

*[RE04400(ALL)01/95] ❑exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) under anycircumstances.

*[RE04500(ALL)01/95] ❑ load your vehicle so that it is heavier thanthe maximum vehicle load rating listed onthe tire decal.

*[RE04600(ALL)01/95] ❑ tow a trailer.

*[RE04700(ALL)01/95] ❑use tire chains on this tire.

*[RE04800(ALL)01/95] ❑ try to repair the temporary spare tire orremove it from its wheel.

*[RE04900(ALL)01/95] ❑use the wheel for any other type of vehicle.

*[RE05000(ALL)01/95] ❑drive through an automatic car wash withthis tire. Because the temporary spare tire issmaller than a conventional tire, it reducesthe ground clearance. Your vehicle may getcaught in the rails and it could be damaged.

%*[RE05100(ALL)03/95] Spare Tire Location

[RE05200(ALL)03/95] If your vehicle is a standard length van model,the spare tire is mounted inside a carrier at theleft rear quarter panel. To remove the spare tire,remove the wing nut and plate. A flat tire canbe temporarily stowed in the same location.

[RE05300(ALL)01/89]


A side mounted spare tire


232

[RE05400(ALL)05/94] If your vehicle is the model with a standardlength body or extended length (all models), thetemporary spare tire is stowed at the rear of thevehicle under the body.

[RE05450(ALL)05/94] The standard length E-4WD model spare tire ismounted on the floor.

[RE05500(ALL)08/95] To remove underbody temporary spare tire:

[RE05600(ALL)11/89] 1. Insert lug nut wrench into the actuator holeand turn counterclockwise until the cableextends to allow the spare tire to be pulledrearward from under the vehicle.

*[RE05700(ALL)10/94] 2. Slide the spare tire to the rear and removethe retainer from the wheel.

[RE05800(ALL)11/89] 3. To stow cable/retainer with spare tireremoved, insert cable fitting into carrier rearwall slot, place wheel retainer against thecarrier, and turn lug nut wrench clockwiseuntil slack is removed.


233

[RE05900(ALL)08/95]


Temporary spare tire location and assembly


234

[RE06000(ALL)08/95] To stow underbody temporary spare tire:

[RE06100(ALL)11/89] 1. Insert lug nut wrench into the actuator holeand turn counterclockwise until thecable/retainer is extended for insertion intothe wheel.

*[RE06200(ALL)10/94] 2. Install the retainer through wheel centerwith valve stem facing up.

[RE06300(ALL)11/89] 3. Rotate wrench clockwise until tire is secured.(Raising mechanism will slip.)

*[RE06400(ALL)03/91] 4. Check for proper seating against underbodysupports and retighten if necessary.

[RE06500(ALL)11/89]


Spare tire — underbody carrier


235


Do not stow any conventional spare tireor flat temporary spare tire in theunderbody position. Doing so may causedamage to the tire, rear axle, or brakelines. (Standard length only)

[RE06800(ALL)01/89] A flat tire can be temporarily secured to thefloor pan under the rear-most seat. Totemporarily secure a flat tire:

[RE06900(ALL)01/89] 1. Remove the spare tire “J” bolt, plate andwing nut from their stowed location on thejack.

[RE07000(ALL)01/89] 2. Position the flat tire, valve stem up, underthe rear-most seat and over the “J” boltattaching bracket on the floor pan.

[RE07100(ALL)01/89] 3. Insert the “J” hook bolt through the center ofthe wheel and hook on bracket.

[RE07200(ALL)06/95] 4. Install plate over “J” hook bolt and securewith wing nut.

[RE07300(ALL)05/89]


Stowed position of “J” bolt, plate and wing nut (Standardlength model)


236

[RE07400(ALL)05/89]


Flat tire stowage (Standard length model)

[RE07600(ALL)08/95]


Extended van underbody outside spare wheel/flat tirestorage


237


Make sure the spare tire and jackingequipment are stowed and secured in theproper storage location.

%*[RE15200(ALL)03/95] Preparing to Change the Tire

*[RE15250(ALL)12/91] NOTE: To lift your vehicle by other than thefront or rear jacking points, be sure touse only hoist adapters with a widecontact surface.

*[RE15325(ALL)03/95] 1. Make sure that your vehicle will not moveor roll. Put the gearshift in P (Park). Set theparking brake and block the wheel that isdiagonally opposite the tire that you arechanging.

*[RE15335(ALL)12/91] NOTE: Make sure the ignition is in the OFFposition.

*[RE15420(ALL)06/95] When one of the back wheels is off the ground,the transmission alone will not prevent thevehicle from moving or slipping off the jack,even if the vehicle is in P (Park). To prevent thevehicle from moving when you change a tire, besure the parking brake is set, then block thewheel (both directions) that is diagonallyopposite (other side and end of the vehicle) tothe tire being changed.


If the vehicle slips off the jack, you orsomeone else could be seriously injured.


238

*[RE15550(ALL)03/95] 2. Get out the spare tire and jack.

[RE15600(ALL)05/89] The jack, jack handle and lug nut wrench arestowed separately on the left hand wheelhouseinner panel on standard length models. And inthe right rear storage compartment on extendedlength models.

[RE15700(ALL)01/89]


Jack stowage

[RE15750(ALL)05/89]


Aerostar extended model jack pack


239

*[RE16800(ALL)12/91] 3. Use the tapered end of the lug nut wrenchto unscrew wheel ornaments attached byretaining screws. Remove any wheel trim.Insert the tapered end of the lug nut wrenchbehind wheel covers or hubcaps and twistoff.

*[RE16900(ALL)10/89] 4. Loosen the wheel nuts by pulling up on thehandle of the lug nut wrench about one-halfturn (counterclockwise). Do not remove thewheel lug nuts until you raise the tire off theground.

[RE17000(ALL)02/95] 5. Unfold the jack handle and lock into thejack. Use the jack handle to slide the jackunder the vehicle.

%*[RE17100(ALL)05/95] Removing and Replacing the Tire

%*[RE17300(ALL)06/95] 1. Positioning the jack

[RE17400(ALL)02/89] a. To raise a front wheel, place the jackunder a horizontal portion of theunderbody member behind the wheel, asshown.

[RE17500(ALL)01/89]


Front jacking point


240

[RE17600(ALL)01/89] b. To raise a rear wheel, place the jackunder a horizontal portion of theunderbody member ahead of the wheelas shown.

[RE17700(ALL)01/89]


Rear jacking point

[RE17800(ALL)01/89] c. Turn the jack handle clockwise until thewheel is completely off the ground.


Never place the jack under the rockerpanels.

*[RE21151(ALL)10/92]



241

*[RE21400(ALL)06/95] 2. Remove the lug nuts with the lug nutwrench.

*[RE21500(ALL)06/95] 3. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire.

*[RE21700(ALL)06/95] 4. Thread the lug nuts on the wheel studs withthe beveled face toward the wheel. Use thelug nut wrench to screw the lug nut snugagainst the wheel but do not tighten.

*[RE22200(ALL)01/95] 5. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handlecounterclockwise.

*[RE22300(ALL)06/95] 6. Remove the jack and fully tighten the lugnuts in the order shown in the followingillustration.

%*[RE22400(ALL)12/89]


Lug nut tightening sequence


Use of wheels or lug nuts other thanoriginal equipment could cause damage tothe wheel or mounting system and allowthe wheels to come off while the vehicleis in motion.

*[RE23500(ALL)07/95] 7. Replace any wheel covers, ornaments, or hubcaps that your vehicle has. Make sure thatthey are screwed or snapped into place.


242

[RE23625(ALL)06/95] 8. Put the tire, jack, and wrench away. Makesure jack is securely fastened so it doesn’trattle when you drive. The carrier isdesigned to hold the temporary spare whichcomes with your vehicle. The stowage of afull size tire in the spare tire carrier maydamage the tire or the vehicle. The flat fullsize tire should be stowed securely in thevehicle until it can be repaired.

*[RE23700(ALL)06/95] 9. Unblock the wheels.

*[RE23800(ALL)06/93] Retighten the wheel lug nuts to the specifiedtorque at 500 miles (800 km) of new vehicleoperation and at intervals specified in theMaintenance Schedule and Record booklet.

*[RE24200(ALL)10/89] Also retighten to the specified torque at 500miles (800 km) of operation after any wheelchange or any time the lug nuts are loosened.


Failure to retighten wheel lug nuts atmileages specified could allow wheels tocome off while the vehicle is in motion.

[RE24315(ALL)02/89]

eight pica chart:0020313-A


243

*[RE24375(ALL)03/95] If the Engine Cranks But DoesNot Start or Does Not Start Aftera Collision

*[RE24400(ALL)07/95] The Fuel Pump Shut-off Switch

*[RE24500(ALL)07/95] If the engine cranks but does not start or if youhave had a collision, the fuel pump shut-offswitch may have been triggered. The shut-offswitch is a device that stops the fuel pumpwhen your vehicle has been involved in asubstantial jolt.

*[RE24600(ALL)07/95] For information on how to check and reset thefuel pump shut-off switch, see Fuel pump shut-offswitch in the Index.

%*[RE24700(ALL)05/95] Towing Your Vehicle[RE24750(ALL)08/95] The recommended method to tow your Aerostar

is with flatbed or wheel lift equipment.However, slingbelt towing is acceptable. Onvehicles equipped with an under-vehicle sparetire carrier, remove the tire assembly from thecarrier and store it in a secure area beforetowing. For E-4WD vehicles, the 4-wheel drivesystem must be disabled prior to towing. Thetransmission must be in N (Neutral) and theignition switch must be in the OFF position todisable the Electronic 4-Wheel Drive System.


244

[RE24775(ALL)08/95]

two third page art:0095060-A


245

Customer Assistance

%*[HS00205(ALL)06/94] Roadside Assistance

*[HS00210(ALL)08/95] Ford Motor Company has set up a 24-hour,seven-day-a-week hotline with trained operatorswho put you in touch with the help you need ifyou experience a problem with your vehicle.This complimentary service is provided to youthroughout your warranty period of 3 years or36,000 miles (60,000 km), whichever comes first.To purchase Roadside Assistance coveragesbeyond this period (available through Ford AutoClub in the United States or Ford andLincoln-Mercury dealers in Canada), contactyour Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer.

*[HS00215(ALL)06/94] Roadside Assistance will cover the following:

*[HS00220(ALL)06/94] ❑Mount your spare if you have a flat tire.

*[HS00225(ALL)06/94] ❑ Jump-start your battery if it is dead.

*[HS00230(ALL)06/94] ❑Unlock your vehicle if you are locked out.

*[HS00235(ALL)06/94] ❑Bring you fuel if you run out.

*[HS00240(ALL)06/94] ❑Tow your vehicle if you are stranded. Evennon-warranty related tows, like accidents orgetting stuck in mud or snow, are covered(some exclusions apply, such as impoundtowing and repossession).

File:13cphsa.exUpdate:Tue Aug 29 17:46:53 1995

246

*[HS00245(ALL)06/94] How to use Roadside Assistance

*[HS00250(ALL)06/94] Your Roadside Assistance identification card canbe found in the Owner Guide portfolio in yourglove compartment. Complete the card and placeit in your wallet for quick reference.

*[HS00255(ALL)04/95] To receive roadside assistance in the UnitedStates call 1-800-241-FORD (in Canada call1-800-665-2006).

*[HS00260(ALL)04/95] Should you need to arrange for roadsideassistance yourself, Ford Motor Company willreimburse the reasonable cost. To obtaininformation about reimbursement call1-800-241-FORD (in Canada call 1-800-665-2006).

*[HS00300(ALL)01/95] If You Have a Service Problem

*[HS00400(ALL)01/95] Ford Motor Company has authorized Ford andLincoln-Mercury dealerships that can serviceyour vehicle for you. This chapter tells you howto get service or maintenance for your vehicle.

%*[HS00550(ALL)02/95] Service/Maintenance Concerns(U.S. or Canada)

*[HS00600(ALL)04/95] Ford recommends taking your vehicle to yourselling dealer who wants to ensure yourcontinued satisfaction. You may, however, takeyour vehicle to any authorized Ford orLincoln-Mercury dealer. In most cases, yourdealer will be able to resolve your concern.

*[HS00700(ALL)04/95] If you are not satisfied with the service youreceived from your dealership’s servicedepartment, talk to the service manager at thedealership, or if you still are not satisfied, talk tothe owner or general manager of the dealership.In most cases, you will have your concernresolved at this level.


247

*[HS01000(ALL)03/95] If you are away from home when your vehicleneeds to be serviced, or if you need more helpthan the dealer gave you, contact the FordCustomer Assistance Center to find anauthorized dealership that may be able to help.

%*[HS01120(ALL)03/95]

one inch art:0060100-E

*[HS01130(ALL)03/95] If you live in Canada and have any questions orconcerns that the dealership cannot answer,contact the Customer Assistance Centre.

%*[HS01140(ALL)04/95]


*[HS01200(ALL)04/95] To process your request, the Ford CustomerAssistance Center needs the followinginformation:

*[HS01300(ALL)04/95] ❑your telephone number (both business andhome)

*[HS01400(ALL)04/95] ❑ the name of the dealer and the city where thedealership is located

*[HS01500(ALL)03/95] ❑ the year and make of your vehicle

*[HS01550(ALL)03/95] ❑ the date purchased

*[HS01600(ALL)03/95] ❑ the current mileage on your vehicle

*[HS01700(ALL)03/95] ❑your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)(listed on your owner card)


248

*[HS01800(ALL)05/95] If you have any questions or concerns that thedealership cannot answer, contact the CustomerAssistance Center.

*[HS02200(ALL)03/95] If you still have a service or product complaint,you may wish to contact the Dispute SettlementBoard (U.S. only) or the Canadian Motor VehicleArbitration Plan (CAMVAP) in Canada.

%*[HS02300(ALL)02/95] The Dispute Settlement Board(U.S. Only)

*[HS02400(ALL)03/95] The Dispute Settlement Board is a voluntary,independent dispute-settlement programavailable free to owners or lessees of qualifyingFord Motor Company vehicles.

*[HS02500(ALL)01/95] The Dispute Settlement Board may not beavailable in all states. Ford Motor Companyreserves the right to change eligibilitylimitations, modify procedures and/or todiscontinue this process at any time withoutnotice and without incurring obligations.

*[HS02600(ALL)01/95] What Kind of Cases Does the BoardReview?

*[HS02700(ALL)08/95] The Board reviews unresolved warrantyperformance complaints on Ford, Mercury andLincoln cars and Ford and Mercury Light Trucksunder warranty that have not been resolved by adealer or Ford Motor Company.

*[HS02750(ALL)03/95] The Board does not review issues involving:

*[HS02800(ALL)01/95] ❑A non-Ford product

*[HS02900(ALL)01/95] ❑A non-Ford dealership

*[HS03100(ALL)01/95] ❑A vehicle sales transaction

*[HS03200(ALL)01/95] ❑A request for reimbursement of consequentialexpenses unless incidental to a service orproduct complaint being reviewed


249

*[HS03300(ALL)01/95] ❑ Items not covered by your warranty

*[HS03400(ALL)01/95] ❑Alleged liability claims

*[HS03450(ALL)01/95] ❑Property damage where such damage issignificant when compared to the economicloss alleged under the warranty dispute

*[HS03500(ALL)01/95] ❑Cases currently in litigation

*[HS03600(ALL)01/95] ❑Vehicles not used primarily for personal,family, or household purposes

*[HS03650(ALL)01/95] NOTE: Complaints involving vehicles onwhich applicable express written newvehicle warranties have expired atreceipt of your application are noteligible. Eligibility may differaccording to state law. For example, seethe unique brochure for Californiapurchasers/lessees.

*[HS03700(ALL)04/95] How Does the Board Work?

*[HS03800(ALL)04/95] The Board has four members:

*[HS03900(ALL)04/95] ❑ three consumer representatives

*[HS04000(ALL)04/95] ❑a Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer

*[HS04200(ALL)04/95] Consumer candidates for Board membership arerecruited and trained by an independentconsulting firm. Dealers are chosen because oftheir business leadership qualities.

*[HS04300(ALL)04/95] If the involved vehicle is within 36 months and36,000 miles of the date of delivery (warrantystart date), you have a right to make an oralpresentation before the Board by indicating yourchoice on the application. Also, oralpresentations may be requested by the Board. Adecision is made by the Board by simplemajority vote.


250

*[HS04350(ALL)04/95] Board members review all the materials relatedto each complaint and, based on the availableinformation, arrive at a fair and impartialdecision. Decisions are based on the writtenstatements and any oral presentations made byeach of the involved parties.

*[HS04400(ALL)04/95] Because the Board usually meets only once amonth, some cases will take longer than 30 daysto be reviewed. The Board will make everyeffort to resolve each case within 40 days after itreceives the customer application form.

*[HS04500(ALL)04/95] After your case has been reviewed, the Boardwill mail you its decision in writing. It will alsoprovide you with a form to indicate youracceptance or rejection of an award decision. Thedecisions of the Board are binding on the dealerand Ford, but customers may have other optionsavailable to them under state or federal law.

*[HS04600(ALL)04/95] The decisions of the Board, however, may beintroduced into evidence by any party insubsequent legal proceedings that may beinitiated.

*[HS04700(ALL)01/95] How Do You Contact the Board?

*[HS04800(ALL)04/95] Write to the Board at the following address torequest a brochure/application. You will be senta brochure and a one-page customer applicationform. The form should be completed and mailedto the same address.

*[HS04900(ALL)02/93]



251

*[HS05100(ALL)04/95] What is the Review Process?

*[HS05200(ALL)04/95] Your application will be reviewed and if it isdetermined to be eligible, you will receive anacknowledgment indicating the file numberassigned to your application and the local Boardaddress. At the same time, your dealer and FordMotor Company representative are asked tosubmit statements.

*[HS05300(ALL)04/95] To review your case properly, the Board needsthe following information:

*[HS05400(ALL)04/95] ❑ legible copies of all documents andmaintenance or repair orders that relate tothe case

*[HS05500(ALL)08/95] ❑ the year, make, model, and vehicleidentification number (VIN)

*[HS05600(ALL)04/95] ❑ the date you bought your vehicle

*[HS05700(ALL)04/95] ❑ the date of repair and the mileage at the timeof repair

*[HS05800(ALL)04/95] ❑ the current mileage

*[HS05900(ALL)04/95] ❑ the name of the dealer who sold you thevehicle or who serviced your vehicle

*[HS06000(ALL)04/95] ❑a brief description of your unresolvedcomplaint

*[HS06100(ALL)05/95] ❑a brief summary of actions that were takenwith the dealer and Ford Motor Company

*[HS06200(ALL)05/95] ❑ the names (if known) of all people youcontacted at the dealership

*[HS06300(ALL)04/95] ❑a description of the action you want done toresolve your concern.

*[HS06305(ALL)07/95] Should your application NOT qualify for review,an explanation will be mailed to you.


252

*[HS06310(ALL)04/95] Ford of Canada does not have a DisputeSettlement Board. If you have a problem thatcannot be resolved by an agreement among you,Ford of Canada, and the Ford dealer, contact theCanadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan(CAMVAP). In many areas of Canada, CAMVAPwill help resolve the problem and, if necessary,will arrange for the matter to be arbitrated.

%*[HS06320(ALL)04/95] Reporting Safety Defects(U.S. Only)

*[HS06340(ALL)01/95] If you believe that your vehicle has a defectwhich could cause a crash or could cause injuryor death, you should immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford MotorCompany.

*[HS06360(ALL)01/95] If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it mayopen an investigation, and if it finds that asafety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it mayorder a recall and remedy campaign. However,NHTSA cannot become involved in individualproblems between you, your dealer, or FordMotor Company.

*[HS06380(ALL)01/95] To contact NHTSA, you may either call the AutoSafety Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or366-0123 in the Washington, D.C. area) or writeto: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation,400 Seventh Street, Washington D.C. 20590. Youcan also obtain other information about motorvehicle safety from the Hotline.


253

%*[HS07700(ALL)05/95] Ford of Canada CustomerAssistance

*[HS07850(ALL)03/95] If you live in Canada and have any questions orconcerns that the dealership cannot answer,contact the Customer Assistance Centre.

*[HS07950(ALL)03/95]


%*[HS08100(ALL)03/95] Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan(CAMVAP)

*[HS08200(ALL)03/95] If a specific item of concern arises, where asolution cannot be reached between a vehicleowner, Ford of Canada, and/or one of itsdealers (that all parties can agree upon), theowner may wish to use the services offered bythe Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan(CAMVAP).

*[HS08300(ALL)08/95] CAMVAP uses the services of ProvincialAdministrators to assist consumers in schedulingand preparing for their arbitration hearings.However, before you can proceed withCAMVAP you must follow your manufacturer’sdispute resolution process as outlined underService/Maintenance Concerns (U.S. or Canada)earlier in this chapter.


254

*[HS08400(ALL)05/95] Consumers wishing to obtain further informationabout the program can obtain an informationbooklet from your dealer or contact theProvincial Administrator, Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan, at the address ortelephone number shown below.

*[HS08450(ALL)05/95] O & P Services595 Bay Street — Suite 300Toronto, OntarioM5G 2C2Telephone 1 (800) 207-0685

*[HS08500(ALL)04/95] This plan is not available in the province ofQuebec.

%*[HS08600(ALL)06/95] Getting Help Outside the U.S.and Canada

*[HS08700(ALL)06/95] Before you export your vehicle to a foreigncountry, contact the appropriate foreign embassyor consulate to make sure local regulations donot prevent you from registering your vehicle.Officials at the embassy can also help you decidewhether you should import your vehicle to thatcountry.

*[HS08800(ALL)06/95] Officials at the embassy or consulate can tell youwhere to get unleaded fuel. If you cannot getunleaded fuel or can get only fuel with ananti-knock index that is lower than your vehicleneeds, contact a district or owner relations officebefore you leave the U.S. or Canada.

*[HS08900(ALL)06/95] Use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without aproper conversion may damage the effectivenessof your emissions control system and may causeengine knocking or serious engine damage. FordMotor Company is not responsible for anydamage that is caused by use of improper fuel.


255

*[HS09000(ALL)06/95] You may also have difficulty importing yourvehicle back into the U.S. if you use leaded fuel.

*[HS09100(ALL)06/95] If your vehicle must be serviced while you aretraveling or living in Central or South America,the Caribbean, or the Middle East, contact thenearest Ford dealership. If the dealership cannothelp you, write to:

*[HS09200(ALL)06/95]


*[HS09300(ALL)06/95] If you are in other foreign countries, contact thenearest Ford dealership. If the dealership cannothelp you, they can direct you to the appropriateFord affiliate office.

*[HS09400(ALL)06/95] If you buy your vehicle in North America andthen relocate outside of the U.S. or Canada,register your Vehicle Identification Number andnew address with Ford Motor Company ExportOperations.


257

Accessories

*[AC00400(ALL)03/95] Ford Accessories for Your Vehicle

*[AC00425(ALL)04/95] Ford has many fine products available fromyour dealer to clean your vehicle and protect itsfinishes. For best results, use the following, orproducts of equivalent quality:

*[AC00450(ALL)05/95]

twelve pica chart:0001433-A

*[AC00500(ALL)04/95] A wide selection of accessories is availablethrough your local authorized dealer. These fineaccessories have been engineered specifically tofulfill your automotive needs. They are customdesigned to complement the style andaerodynamic appearance of your Ford-builtvehicle. In addition, each accessory is made fromhigh quality materials and meets or exceedsFord’s rigid engineering and safety specifications.That is why Ford brand accessories arewarranted for up to 3 years or 36,000 miles(60,000 km), whichever comes first. See yourdealer for complete warranty information andaccessory availability.

File:14cpaca.exUpdate:Tue Aug 29 17:52:30 1995

258

[AC00700(ALL)06/95]

twenty-four pica chart:0095004-A


259

[AC00800(ALL)06/95]

ten pica chart:0095005-A

*[AC01900(ALL)01/95] NOTE: When adding accessories, equipment,passengers, and luggage to yourvehicle, do not exceed the total weightcapacity of the vehicle or of the frontor rear axle (GVWR, GAWR as shownon the Safety Compliance CertificationLabel). Consult your dealer for specificweight information.

*[AC02000(ALL)05/95] NOTE: The Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) or the CanadianRadio Telecommunications Commission(CRTC) regulates the use of mobilecommunications systems — such astwo-way radios, telephones, and theftalarms — that are equipped with radiotransmitters. Any such equipmentinstalled in your vehicle should complywith FCC or CRTC regulations andshould be installed only by a qualifiedtechnician.


260

*[AC02100(ALL)01/95] NOTE: Mobile communications systems mayharm the operation of your vehicle,particularly if they are not properlydesigned for automotive use or are notproperly installed. For example, whenoperated, such systems may cause theengine to stumble or stall. In addition,such systems may themselves bedamaged or their operation affected byoperating your vehicle. (Citizens band[CB] transceivers, garage door openers,and other transmitters whose poweroutput is 5 watts or less will notordinarily affect your vehicle’soperation.)

*[AC02200(ALL)05/95] NOTE: Because we have no control over theinstallation, design, or manufacture ofsuch systems, Ford cannot assumeresponsibility for any adverse effects ordamage that may result if you use thisequipment.


262

[AC03100(ALL)08/95]



263

[AC03200(ALL)08/95]



264

[AC03300(ALL)08/95]



265

Servicing Your Aerostar

%*[SV00300(ALL)03/95] Service Made Easy

*[SV00400(ALL)01/95] Ford has two goals for servicing your vehicle.

*[SV00500(ALL)01/95] 1. When we can, we design parts that do notneed to be serviced.

*[SV00600(ALL)01/95] 2. We want to make servicing your vehicle aseasy as possible. To help you:

*[SV00700(ALL)01/95] ❑We highlight do-it-yourself items in yellow inthe engine compartment so that you can findthem easily.

*[SV00800(ALL)01/95] ❑When possible, we design parts — such asthe headlamp bulbs — that can be replacedwithout tools.

*[SV00900(ALL)05/94] ❑We give you a Maintenance Schedule thatmakes tracking routine service for yourvehicle easy. The maintenance schedule islocated in the Maintenance Schedule and Recordbooklet.

*[SV01000(ALL)01/95] This chapter tells you about the basic parts thatyou need to check and service regularly.

*[SV01050(ALL)02/95] If your vehicle needs professional servicing, yourdealership can provide the parts and servicerequired. Check your Warranty Information Bookletto find out which parts and services are covered.Also see the Customer Assistance chapter of thisOwner Guide.

File:15cpsva.exUpdate:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995

266

*[SV01300(ALL)03/95] Ford Motor Company recommends that youperform the Owner Maintenance Checks listed inthe Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet.These services are important for the properoperation of your vehicle. In addition to theconditions listed in the Owner MaintenanceChecklist, be alert for any unusual noise,vibration, or other indication that your vehiclemay need service. If you do notice somethingunusual, see that your vehicle is servicedpromptly.

*[SV01350(ALL)03/95] Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids,and service parts conforming to Fordspecifications. Motorcraft parts are designed andbuilt to provide the best performance in yourvehicle. Using these parts for replacement isyour assurance that Ford-built quality stays inyour vehicle.

%*[SV01400(ALL)04/95] NOTE: Always dispose of used automotivefluids in a responsible manner. Followyour community’s standards fordisposing of these types of fluids. Callyour local recycling center to find outabout recycling automotive fluids.

%*[SV01600(ALL)06/95] Precautions When Servicing YourVehicle

*[SV01700(ALL)06/95] Be especially careful when inspecting orservicing your vehicle. Here are some generalprecautions for your safety:

*[SV01900(ALL)06/95] ❑ If you must work with the engine running,avoid wearing loose clothing or jewelry thatcould get caught in moving parts. Takeappropriate precautions with long hair.

*[SV02000(ALL)06/95] ❑Do not work on a vehicle in an enclosedspace with the engine running, unless you aresure you have enough ventilation.


267

*[SV02100(ALL)08/95] ❑Never get under a vehicle while it issupported only by a jack. If you must workunder a vehicle, use safety stands.

*[SV02200(ALL)06/95] ❑Keep all lit cigarettes and other smokingmaterials away from the battery and allfuel-related parts.

*[SV02500(ALL)03/95] If you disconnect the battery, the engine must“relearn” its idle conditions before your vehiclewill drive properly. To find out how the enginedoes this, see Battery in this chapter.

*[SV02600(ALL)03/95] Working with the engine off:

*[SV02650(ALL)03/95] 1. Set the parking brake fully and make surethat the gearshift is securely latched in P(Park).

*[SV02700(ALL)06/95] 2. Remove the key from the ignition after youturn the engine off.

*[SV02725(ALL)06/95] 3. Block the wheels. This will prevent yourvehicle from moving unexpectedly.

*[SV02750(ALL)03/95] Working with the engine on:

*[SV02785(ALL)03/95] 1. Set the parking brake fully and make surethat the gearshift is securely latched in P(Park).

*[SV02800(ALL)03/95] 2. Block the wheels. This will prevent yourvehicle from moving unexpectedly.

*[SV02900(ALL)02/95] RWARNING

Do not start your engine with the aircleaner removed and do not remove itwhile the engine is running.


268

%*[SV02950(ALL)03/95] Opening the Hood

*[SV03000(ALL)12/91] 1. Pull the hood release handle, located next tothe parking brake pedal.

[SV03025(ALL)06/95]


Hood release handle

*[SV03050(ALL)12/91] 2. While applying downward pressure on thehood, push the hood latch handle locatedbehind the grille near the center front of thevehicle to the left.

*[SV03100(ALL)08/94] 3. Disconnect the hood support from theretaining clip on the radiator support andplace it into the slot marked PROP in theunderside of the hood.

[SV03400(ALL)08/95]


Hood and support rod


269

*[SV03800(ALL)08/94] To close the hood, raise it so that the supportrod comes away from the slotted hole in thehood. Place the support rod in its retaining clipand close the hood with enough force to make itlatch. Be sure to oil the hood latch every sixmonths to maintain smooth operation.

*[SV03900(ALL)05/90] Always attempt to lift the hood after closing tobe sure it is securely latched.

%*[SV04500(ALL)04/95] Engine Compartment

*[SV04600(ALL)05/94] Your vehicle has one of the following types ofengines:

*[SV05455(ALL)08/95] ❑A 3.0 Liter SEFI, V-6 engine or

*[SV05460(ALL)08/95] ❑A 4.0 Liter SEFI, V-6 engine.

*[SV05500(ALL)11/94] The following pages show diagrams of eachengine type and where to find items that youshould regularly service.


270

[SV05550(ALL)08/95]

full page art:0095038-B

3.0L engine compartment service points


271

[SV05575(ALL)05/94]

full page art:0020532-I

4.0L engine compartment service points


272

%*[SV05580(ALL)04/95] Cleaning the Engine

*[SV05590(ALL)04/95] A clean engine is more efficient because abuildup of grease and dirt acts as an insulator,keeping the engine warmer than usual.

*[SV05592(ALL)07/95] ❑Extreme care must be used if a power washeris used to clean the engine. The high pressurefluid could penetrate sealed parts andassemblies causing damage or malfunctions.

[SV05594(ALL)08/95] ❑ In order to avoid possible cracking of theengine block, do not spray a hot engine withcold water.

[SV05596(ALL)06/95] ❑The alternator and air intake must becovered. Covering these components will helpprevent water damage.

*[SV05598(ALL)04/95] ❑Never wash or rinse the engine while it isrunning. Water getting into the engine maycause internal damage.


273

%*[SV06100(ALL)03/95] Filling the Fuel Tank[SV06250(ALL)08/91]


Fuel filler door

%*[SV06550(ALL)02/91] Opening the Fuel Filler Door

[SV06610(ALL)03/91] Fuel filler door remote release

[SV06620(ALL)03/95] To open the fuel filler door latch, pull on therelease lever between the driver’s seat and thedoor. You cannot open the fuel filler door bypulling on the door itself.

[SV06625(ALL)12/91]


Fuel filler door remote release lever

[SV06630(ALL)03/95] If the release lever is stuck or damaged and youcannot open the fuel filler door, you must usethe override cord located at the back of the leftrear wheelhouse. (On extended versions therelease lever is located in the stowage box.)


274

[SV06640(ALL)08/95] The manual release cord is attached to a Thandle marked FUEL FILLER DOOR RELEASE— MANUAL OVERRIDE. When you pull it, thefuel filler door opens.

[SV06651(ALL)08/95]


Fuel filler door override handle

%*[SV06700(ALL)01/95] Removing the fuel cap

*[SV06750(ALL)01/95] The proper instructions for removing the fuelcap are as follows:

*[SV06800(ALL)03/90] ❑Unscrew the fuel cap by exerting pressure onthe plastic lock bar and rotating the fuel capcounterclockwise.

*[SV06850(ALL)08/95] ❑Turn the fuel cap 1/2 to 3/4 of a turn until ahissing sound is heard. When the hissingsound stops, continue rotatingcounterclockwise to remove the fuel cap.

*[SV06900(ALL)03/93] ❑Make sure that you follow the above fuel capremoval instructions and use caution. Suchcaution will minimize the possibility of fuelspraying during removal of the fuel cap.


275

*[SV06950(ALL)03/91] To replace and secure the fuel cap; place it inposition and rotate it clockwise until it clicks(ratchets). Doing so will not damage or breakthe fuel cap. The ratcheting mechanism allowsthe fuel cap to be sealed without overtightening.

*[SV06990(ALL)07/95] If you lose the fuel cap, replace it with anauthorized Motorcraft or equivalent part.

%*[SV07000(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

If you do not use the proper fuel cap, thepressure in the fuel tank can damage thefuel system or cause it to work improperlyin a collision.

*[SV07025(ALL)05/95] NOTE: If you replace your fuel cap with anaftermarket fuel filler cap, the customerwarranty may be void for any damageto the fuel tank and/or fuel system.


If the fuel cap is venting vapor or if youhear a hissing sound, wait until it stopsbefore completely removing the cap.

*[SV07060(ALL)11/89] A venting fuel tank is not an abnormalcondition. It may be caused by:

*[SV07061(ALL)07/95] ❑Too volatile a fuel for the weather conditions.The service stations sometimes sell wintergrade fuel in the summer.

*[SV07062(ALL)11/89] ❑Pulling a heavy load on hot days, or at highaltitudes.

*[SV07063(ALL)11/89] ❑Extended periods of idling with the engineRPM increased above the normal idle range.

*[SV07064(ALL)11/89] ❑Parking vehicle in full sunlight for extendedperiods on extremely hot days.


276

%*[SV07500(ALL)06/95] Choosing the Right Fuel

*[SV07600(ALL)06/95] Use only UNLEADED FUEL in your vehicle.Using leaded fuel is prohibited by federal law.Your warranty may not apply if your vehicle isdamaged because you used the wrong fuel.

*[SV07625(ALL)08/95] Vehicle inspection programs may detectmisfueling. Under these circumstances, you maybe required by law to make costly repairs atyour own expense.

%*[SV08750(ALL)08/95] Octane recommendations

*[SV08800(ALL)08/95] Your engine is designed to use regularunleaded fuel with an octane rating of 87. Inmost cases, it is not necessary to use a fuel withan octane rating higher than 87. At servicestations, the octane rating is displayed on a labelon the pumps.

*[SV08900(ALL)06/95]


Typical octane rating label

*[SV09050(ALL)07/95] In some parts of the country, “regular” gradefuels are sold with octane ratings of 86 or evenless, especially in high altitude areas. Werecommend that you do not use these fuels.Always use a fuel with an octane rating of 87,even if it is sold as a “midgrade” or “premium.”

[SV09200(ALL)08/95] Do not be concerned if your vehicle sometimesknocks lightly when you drive up a hill or whenyou accelerate. However, if a fuel with therecommended octane rating knocks heavilyunder all driving conditions or knocks lightlydriving at cruising speed on level roads, seeyour dealer or a qualified service technician.Persistent, heavy knocking can damage theengine.


277

%*[SV09300(ALL)08/95] Fuel quality

*[SV09450(ALL)06/95] If you are experiencing starting, rough idle orhesitation problems when the engine is cold, itmay be caused by fuel with low volatility. Try adifferent brand of fuel. If the condition persists,see your dealer or a qualified service technician.

*[SV09455(ALL)08/95] Using a high-quality fuel makes your vehiclemore responsive and maintains its good fueleconomy and emissions by:

*[SV09460(ALL)08/95] ❑minimizing deposits in fuel injectors,combustion chambers and on intake valves.

*[SV09465(ALL)08/95] ❑assuring quick starting and smooth warm-up.

*[SV09470(ALL)08/95] ❑protecting the fuel system from vapor lock invery hot weather, which causes the engine tohesitate or stall and makes restarts difficult.

*[SV09475(ALL)08/95] ❑protecting your fuel system from rusting.

*[SV09480(ALL)08/95] ❑preventing the fuel lines from freezing.

*[SV09485(ALL)08/95] ❑preventing the fuel system from “gummingup” when your vehicle is not used for longperiods of time.

*[SV09500(ALL)06/95] It should not be necessary to add anyaftermarket products to your fuel tank if youcontinue to use a high-quality fuel.

%*[SV09600(ALL)04/95] Gasolines for clean air

*[SV09900(ALL)06/95] Fuels in certain areas of the country are requiredto contain oxygenates to improve air quality.Common oxygenates are ethanol or grain alcohol(blended at no more than 10%), methanol orwood alcohol (blended at no more than 5% withcosolvents and additives), and MTBE or methyltertiary butyl ether (blended at no more than15%).


278

*[SV09950(ALL)08/95] Reformulated fuel is also required in certainareas of the U.S. These fuels are designed tofurther reduce the emissions from your vehicle.

*[SV10000(ALL)06/95] Generally, you should not experience difficultiesoperating your vehicle on fuels containingoxygenates. We encourage you to use thesefuels.

%*[SV10185(ALL)06/95] Safety Information Relating to AutomotiveFuels


Automotive fuels can cause serious injuryor death if misused or mishandled.

[SV10198(ALL)08/95] ❑Turn vehicle off when refueling.

*[SV10202(ALL)07/95] ❑Do not smoke when refueling. Fuels areextremely flammable.

*[SV10206(ALL)07/95] ❑Do not siphon any fuel by mouth.


Gasoline or gasoline blended withmethanol can cause blindness andpossible death when swallowed. If anyfuel is swallowed, call a physician orpoison control center immediately.

*[SV10209(ALL)07/95] ❑Avoid breathing vapors while refueling.

*[SV10211(ALL)07/95] ❑ If fuel is splashed on the skin, wash withsoap and water.

*[SV10213(ALL)07/95] ❑ If fuel is splashed in the eyes, remove contactlenses (if worn), flush with water for 15minutes, and seek medical attention.

*[SV10215(ALL)07/95] Gasoline and gasoline blends may contain smallamounts of carcinogens, such as benzene.Long-term exposure to unleaded gasoline vaporshas caused cancer in laboratory animals.


279

*[SV10230(ALL)08/95] If you are taking the medication “Antabuse” orother forms of disulfiram for the treatment ofalcoholism, vapor or skin contact with agasoline-methanol blend may cause the samekind of adverse reaction as drinking an alcoholicbeverage. In sensitive individuals, seriouspersonal injury or sickness could result. Consulta physician promptly if you experience anadverse reaction.

*[SV10300(ALL)02/95] Filling the fuel tank


Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressurein an overfilled tank may cause leakageand lead to fuel spray and fire.

*[SV10500(ALL)01/95] To fill the fuel tank properly:

*[SV10550(ALL)01/95] NOTE: Extinguish all lit cigarettes, othersmoking materials, and any openflames before fueling your vehicle.

*[SV10600(ALL)01/95] 1. Remove the fuel cap by following theinstructions above under Removing the FuelCap in this chapter. Proceed to add fuel tothe tank only if your vehicle is on levelground.

*[SV10700(ALL)05/95] 2. Make sure that you pump unleaded fuel andput the nozzle all the way inside the fuelfiller pipe.

*[SV10800(ALL)08/95] 3. If you spill any fuel on the body of yourvehicle, clean it off immediately. The fuelmay dull or soften the paint if you do notwash it off.

*[SV10900(ALL)08/95] 4. Replace the fuel cap completely when youare finished. Turn it clockwise 1/4 turn untilit is fully tight. It will click when it is fullytightened.


280

*[SV11000(ALL)01/95] You may occasionally hear and/or feel a slightthump occurring one or two seconds after agentle stop. This is normal and generally occurswith the fuel tank 3/4 full. It is caused by thewave action of the fuel within the tank.

%*[SV11300(ALL)05/95] Running Out of Fuel

*[SV11400(ALL)05/95] If your vehicle runs out of fuel, try to stop onlevel ground away from traffic. Add at least twogallons (8 liters) of fuel to start your vehicleagain. If your vehicle is not on level ground,you may need as much as five gallons (20 liters)of fuel to start it.

*[SV11450(ALL)08/95] NOTE: Avoid running out of fuel because thissituation may have an adverse effect onmodern powertrain components.

*[SV11500(ALL)07/95] You may need to crank the engine several timesbefore the fuel system starts to pump fuel fromthe tank to the engine.

%*[SV11600(ALL)05/95] Fuel Economy

*[SV11700(ALL)07/95] Fuel economy is an estimate of the efficiency ofyour vehicle and can be calculated as Miles PerGallon (MPG) or Liters Per 100 Kilometers(L/100K). Do not calculate the fuel economyduring your vehicle’s break-in period. Thiswould not be an accurate estimate of how muchfuel your vehicle will normally use.

*[SV11800(ALL)05/95] To calculate fuel economy:

*[SV11900(ALL)06/95] 1. Fill the tank completely and record theinitial odometer reading.

*[SV12000(ALL)06/95] 2. Every time you buy fuel record theamount (in gallons or liters) purchased.

[SV12200(ALL)08/95] 3. After at least three to five tankfuls, fill thefuel tank and record the final odometerreading.


281

*[SV12225(ALL)08/95] 4. Use these equations to calculate your fueleconomy:

*[SV12250(ALL)08/95] ❑English: MPG = (total miles driven) v(gallons used)

[SV12275(ALL)08/95] ❑Metric: L/100k = (100 x liters used) v (totalkilometers driven)

%*[SV12300(ALL)08/95] Comparisons With EnvironmentalProtection Agency (EPA) and TransportCanada (TC) Fuel Economy Estimates

*[SV12400(ALL)08/95] EPA and TC fuel economy figures are obtainedfrom laboratory tests under simulated roadconditions and thus are estimates which may notreflect the actual conditions you experience oryour personal style of driving. The EPA or TCfuel economy estimate is not a guarantee thatyou will achieve the fuel economy shown.

*[SV12675(ALL)05/95] The following decrease fuel economy:

*[SV12720(ALL)08/95] ❑Lack of regular, scheduled maintenance

*[SV12740(ALL)05/95] ❑Excessive speed

*[SV12760(ALL)03/95] ❑Rapid acceleration

*[SV12780(ALL)05/95] ❑Driving with your foot on the brake

*[SV12820(ALL)05/95] ❑Sudden stops

*[SV12840(ALL)05/95] ❑Extended engine idling

*[SV12860(ALL)05/95] ❑Using speed control in hilly terrain

*[SV12880(ALL)05/95] ❑Extended use of the A/C, defroster, rearwindow defroster and other accessories

*[SV12920(ALL)05/95] ❑Underinflated tires

*[SV12940(ALL)05/95] ❑Heavy loads

*[SV12960(ALL)05/95] ❑Aftermarket add-ons such as bike, ski orluggage racks, bug deflectors, etc.


282

%*[SV13600(ALL)02/95] Engine Oil Recommendations

*[SV13610(ALL)03/95] We recommend using Motorcraft oil or anequivalent oil meeting Ford SpecificationESE-M2C153-E and displaying the AmericanPetroleum Institute CERTIFICATION MARK onthe front of the container.

*[SV13650(ALL)03/95]

one third page art:0060021-E

The API Certification Mark

*[SV13670(ALL)01/95] Never use:

*[SV13680(ALL)01/95] ❑“Non-Detergent” oils

*[SV13690(ALL)04/95] ❑Oils labeled API SA, SB, SC, SD, SE, SF or SG

%*[SV13700(ALL)01/95] ❑Additional engine oil additives, oil treatmentsor engine treatments

%*[SV13710(ALL)06/95] Engine oils with an SAE 5W-30 viscosity arePREFERRED for your vehicle. They provide thebest engine performance, fuel economy andengine protection for all climates down to -15˚F(-25˚C).

%*[SV13750(ALL)03/95] Synthetic engine oils which are CERTIFIED andof the preferred viscosity may be used in yourengine. The engine oil and oil filter must still bechanged according to the maintenance schedule.


283

%*[SV13775(ALL)01/95] Checking and Adding Engine Oil

*[SV13800(ALL)03/95] Since the proper amount of engine oil isimportant for safe engine operation, check the oilusing the dipstick each time you put fuel inyour vehicle. Remember the engine must be off,the oil must be warm and the vehicle must beparked on level ground.

%*[SV13900(ALL)03/95] Checking the engine oil level:

*[SV14000(ALL)02/95] 1. Turn the engine off after it has warmed upand allow a few minutes for the engine oilto drain back into the oil pan.

*[SV14050(ALL)03/95] 2. Set the parking brake, making sure thegearshift is securely latched in P (Park).

*[SV14100(ALL)02/95] 3. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engineheat.

*[SV14200(ALL)03/95] 4. Locate the engine oil dipstick (highlighted inyellow) and carefully pull it out of theengine.

*[SV14300(ALL)01/95] 5. Wipe the dipstick clean and put it back intoposition, making sure it is fully seated.

[SV14400(ALL)06/95]


Engine oil dipstick


284

*[SV14500(ALL)03/95] 6. Carefully, pull the dipstick out again. If theoil level is below the “ADD 1 QT” line, addengine oil as necessary. If the oil level isbeyond the letter “F” in Full, engine damageor high oil consumption may occur andsome oil must be removed from the engine.

*[SV14600(ALL)01/95] 7. Put the dipstick back in and make sure it isfully seated.

%*[SV14700(ALL)03/95] Adding engine oil

*[SV14800(ALL)01/95] It may be necessary to add some oil between oilchanges. Make sure you use a CERTIFIEDengine oil of the preferred viscosity. Yourvehicle’s warranty coverage may not apply ifengine damage is caused by the use of improperengine oil.

*[SV15000(ALL)03/95] Add engine oil through the oil filler caphighlighted in yellow. To add oil, remove thefiller cap and use a funnel to pour oil into theopening. Be careful not to overfill the engine.Recheck the oil level after you finish adding oil.

%*[SV17300(ALL)03/95] Engine Coolant%*[SV17400(ALL)03/95] Checking the Engine Coolant

*[SV17500(ALL)02/95] NOTE: Be sure to read and understandPrecautions When Servicing YourVehicle at the beginning of this chapter.

*[SV17700(ALL)08/95] Your vehicle’s engine coolant protects the enginefrom overheating in the summer and fromfreezing in the winter. Check the level of theengine coolant at least once a month, butpreferably each time you stop for fuel. Simplylook at the engine coolant recovery reservoirlocated in the engine compartment. To locatethis reservoir, see the diagram of your vehicle’sengine under Engine Compartment in this chapter.


285

[SV17740(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Never remove the coolant recovery capwhile the engine is running or hot.

*[SV17750(ALL)03/95] If the engine coolant has not been checked for along period of time the engine coolant reservoirmay eventually empty. If the engine coolantreservoir empties, check the engine coolant levelin the radiator. Read the following warningsbefore removing the radiator cap. If it isnecessary to fill the radiator, refer to the EngineCoolant Refill Procedure in this chapter forinstructions.

[SV17765(ALL)08/95] 1. Before you remove the radiator cap, turn theengine off and let it cool. Even when theengine is cool, be careful when you removethe radiator cap.

[SV17770(ALL)05/95] 2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick clotharound the cap and turn it slowlycounterclockwise to the first stop.

[SV17775(ALL)03/95] 3. Step back while the pressure releases.

[SV17780(ALL)03/95] 4. When you are sure that all the pressure hasbeen released, use the cloth to turn andremove cap.

[SV17785(ALL)03/95] 5. Stand away from the radiator opening. Hotsteam may blow out or hot engine coolantmay even splash out.


286

[SV17950(ALL)08/95] Adding Engine Coolant

[SV18000(ALL)08/95]


Adding engine coolant to reservoir

[SV20075()08/95] RWARNING

Be careful not to add engine coolant tothe windshield washer fluid reservoir. Ifsprayed on the windshield, engine coolantcould make it difficult to see through thewindshield.

[SV20100()08/95] When the engine is cool, add a 50/50 mixture ofengine coolant and water to the engine coolantrecovery reservoir - DO NOT ADD DIRECTLYTO THE RADIATOR. Add straight water only inan emergency, but you should replace it with a50/50 mixture of coolant and distilled water assoon as possible.

[SV20125()08/95] Check the coolant level in the coolant recoveryreservoir the next few times you drive thevehicle. If necessary, add enough of a 50/50mixture of coolant and water to bring the liquidlevel to the fill line on the reservoir.

[SV20150()08/95] RWARNING

Never remove the coolant recovery capwhile the engine is running or hot.


287

[SV20175()08/95] If you must remove the coolant recovery cap,follow these steps to avoid personal injurycasued by escaping steam or engine coolant:

[SV20200()08/95] 1. Before you remove the cap, turn the engineoff and let it cool.

[SV20225()08/95] 2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick clotharound the cap and turn it slowly,counterclockwise to the first stop.

[SV20250()08/95] 3. Step back while the pressure releases.

[SV20275()08/95] 4. When you are sure that all the pressure hasbeen released, use the cloth to press the capdown, turn it counterclockwise, and removeit.

[SV20295()08/95] Use Ford Premium Engine CoolantE2FZ-19549-AA (in Canada, Motorcraft CXC-8-B)or an equivalent premium engine coolant thatmeets Ford Specification ESE-M97B44-A. FordPremium Engine Coolant is an optimizedformula that will protect all metals and rubberelastomers used in Ford cooling systems for 4years or 50,000 miles (80,000 km).

[SV20300()08/95] Do not use alcohol or methanol antifreeze or anyengine coolants mixed with alcohol or methanolantifreeze. Do not use supplemental coolantadditives in your vehicle. These additives mayharm your engine cooling system. The use of animproper coolant may void the warranty ofyour vehicle’s engine cooling system.

[SV20325()08/95] Recycled engine coolant

[SV20350()08/95] Ford Motor Company recommends that Fordand Lincoln-Mercury dealers use recycled enginecoolant produced by Ford-approved processes.Not all coolant recycling processes producecoolant which meets Ford specificationESE-M97B44-A, and use of such coolant mayharm engine and cooling system components.


288

[SV20375()08/95] Always dispose of used automotive fluids in aresponsible manner. Follow your community’sregulations and standards for recycling anddisposing of automotive fluids.

[SV20400()08/95] Coolant refill capacity

[SV20425()08/95] To find out how much fluid your vehicle’scooling system can hold, see Refill capacities forfluids in the Index.

[SV20450()08/95] Have your dealer check the engine coolingsystem for leaks if you have to add more than aquart (liter) of engine coolant per month.

[SV20475()08/95] Severe winter climate

[SV20490()08/95] If you drive in extremely cold climates (less than-34˚F [-36˚C]), it may be necessary to increasethe coolant concentration above 50%. Refer tothe chart on the coolant container to ensure thecoolant concentration in your vehicle is such thatthe coolant will not freeze at the temperaturelevel in which you drive during winter months.Never increase the engine coolant concentrationabove 60%. Leave a 50/50 mixture of enginecoolant and water in your vehicle year-round innon-extreme climates.

%*[SV20500(ALL)08/95] Checking Hoses

*[SV20600(ALL)10/89] Inspect all engine and heater system hoses fordeterioration, leaks and loose clamps beforeadding or replacing engine coolant. Makewhatever repairs or replacements that arenecessary using Motorcraft parts or theirequivalents.


289

%*[SV20700(ALL)08/95] Engine Coolant Drain and Flush

*[SV20800(ALL)10/89] To drain your vehicle’s engine coolant:

*[SV20900(ALL)03/94] 1. Turn off the engine and let it cool. Fullydepressurize the engine cooling system bycovering the radiator cap with a thick clothand turning it slowly counterclockwise to thefirst stop. Step back while the pressurereleases.

*[SV20950(ALL)05/90] 2. Remove the cap.

*[SV21000(ALL)05/90] 3. Attach a small hose to the drain tube at thebottom of the radiator.

*[SV21200(ALL)05/90] 4. Let the engine coolant drain into a suitablecontainer. Disconnect the lower radiator hoseat the radiator connector and drain anyremaining engine coolant into a container.

*[SV21225(ALL)05/94] 5. Reconnect the lower radiator hose and closethe radiator drain cock.

*[SV21250(ALL)05/95] Proper procedures for flushing the coolingsystem can be found in the Service Manual.

%*[SV21300(ALL)08/95] Engine coolant refill procedure

*[SV21400(ALL)10/89] After you have drained the engine coolingsystem:

*[SV21500(ALL)01/89] 1. Fill the radiator with a 50/50 mixture of thespecified engine coolant concentrate andwater. Allow several minutes for trapped airto escape (bubble out) and for engine coolantto flow through the radiator.

*[SV21900(ALL)03/94] 2. Replace the radiator cap to its fully installedposition, then back off to the first stop. Thiswill prevent high pressure from building upin the cooling system during this part of thefill procedure.


290

[SV22000(ALL)03/91] 3. Turn the heater (temperature and modeselection) knobs to maximum heat positionsand operate the engine at fast idle(approximately 2000 RPM) for three to fourminutes.

*[SV22200(ALL)05/95] 4. Shut off the engine and allow the engine tocool. Cover the radiator cap with a thickcloth and cautiously remove it. Step backwhile the pressure releases.

[SV22300(ALL)05/89] 5. Add the engine coolant mixture to a levelapproximately 1 to 1 1/2 inches (38 mm)below the filler neck seat.

[SV22400(ALL)05/89] 6. Reinstall the radiator cap fully and back offto the first stop. Once again, turn the engineat fast idle until the upper radiator hose iswarm and the thermostat is open.

[SV22550(ALL)05/89] 7. Finally, check the radiator and add moreengine coolant if needed, following theprocedures noted above. Reinstall theradiator cap securely, when finished.

[SV22555(ALL)05/95] 8. If more engine coolant is necessary, removethe small plug from the top of the enginecoolant recovery reservoir (not the large capof the windshield washer reservoir) and add1.1 quarts (1 liter) of the 50/50 enginecoolant mixture. Replace the plug in itsoriginal position.

*[SV22565(ALL)08/95] NOTE: Due to air being trapped in the 4.0Lengine cooling system, it is notunusual to experience a 4 to 7 ounce(120 to 210 ml) coolant loss up to 7,500miles (12,000 km) after initial systemfill.


291

*[SV22620(ALL)06/95] In order to bleed the cooling system properlyafter initial fill with coolant, it might need upto five cycles of:

*[SV22630(ALL)06/95] ❑heating up the system (thermostat open)

*[SV22640(ALL)06/95] ❑making sure coolant is at least up to thecold fill mark of overflow bottle

*[SV22650(ALL)06/95] ❑ letting the coolant cool down (enginecoolant temperature gauge below the N ofNORMAL)

*[SV22660(ALL)06/95] ❑ topping off the coolant overflow bottle tothe cold fill mark

*[SV22680(ALL)06/95] If coolant loss continues after 7,500 miles(12,000 km), consult your Ford Dealer.

%*[SV22700(ALL)03/95] Windshield Washer Fluid andWipers

%*[SV22800(ALL)03/95] Washer Fluid

*[SV22900(ALL)01/95] Check the level of the windshield washer fluidevery time you stop for fuel. The reservoir forthe windshield washer fluid is located in theengine compartment.


Do not put windshield washer fluid in thecontainer for the engine coolant.

[SV23400(ALL)01/89]


Windshield washer reservoir


292

%*[SV23850(ALL)01/95] Use specially formulated windshield washerfluid rather than plain water, because speciallyformulated washer fluids contain additives thatdissolve road grime. For safety reasons, washerfluids containing an appropriate antifreeze suchas methanol should be used in freezing weather(temperatures below 32˚F [0˚C]). State or localregulations on Volatile Organic Compounds(VOC’s) may restrict use of the most commonantifreeze, methanol. Washer fluids containingnon-methanol antifreeze agents should be usedonly if they provide cold weather protectionwithout damaging the vehicle’s paint finish,wiper blades, and windshield washer system.

*[SV23900(ALL)10/89] If you choose to use a windshield washingsolution that must be mixed, follow themanufacturer’s mixing instructions. Improperlymixed solutions may freeze unexpectedly.

*[SV24300(ALL)03/90] Checking/adding the washer fluid for theliftgate

[SV24400(ALL)03/95] Check the liftgate washer reservoir regularly.This is not the same reservoir your frontwindshield wipers use. The opening for thisreservoir is on the right side of the liftgate abovethe tail lamp. A fill cup is located on top of theright hand tail lamp and is accessible when theliftgate is open. Close the fill cup cover afterfilling and before closing the liftgate. Refill thisreservoir with the same solution you use foryour windshield. To find out how much washerfluid the liftgate reservoir holds, see Refillcapacities in the Index.


293

[SV24450(ALL)12/91]


Liftgate window washer reservoir

%*[SV24500(ALL)03/95] Wiper Blades

*[SV24600(ALL)03/95] Check the windshield wiper blades at least twicea year. Also check them whenever they seemless effective than usual. Substances such as treesap and some hot wax treatments used bycommercial car washes reduce the effectivenessof wiper blades.

*[SV24700(ALL)03/95] If the blades do not wipe properly, clean boththe windshield and the wiper blades. Useundiluted windshield washer solution or a milddetergent. Rinse thoroughly with clear water. Donot use fuel, kerosene, paint thinner, or othersolvents to clean your wiper blades. These willdamage your blades.

*[SV24800(ALL)03/95] To make reaching the wiper blades easy, simplyturn the ignition to the ACC position and turnyour wipers on. Wait for them to reach avertical position and turn the ignition to the OFFposition. Do not move the wipers manually.Manually moving the wipers across thewindshield may damage them.


294

*[SV24900(ALL)03/01] Wiper blade replacement

*[SV25000(ALL)07/95] If the wiper blades still do not work properlyafter you clean them, you may need to replacethe wiper blade assembly or the blade element.When replacing the wiper blade assembly, bladerefill, or wiper arm always use a Motorcraft partor equivalent. To replace the blades, follow theinstructions that come with them.

%*[SV25200(ALL)03/95] Tires

*[SV25300(ALL)03/95] Look at your tires each time you fill your fueltank. If one tire looks lower than the others,check the pressure in all of them. Always followthese precautions:

*[SV25400(ALL)03/95] ❑Keep your tires inflated to the recommendedpressures.

*[SV25500(ALL)02/95] ❑Stay within the recommended load limits (seeLoad limits in the Index).

*[SV25600(ALL)02/95] ❑Make sure the weight of your load is evenlydistributed.

*[SV25700(ALL)10/89] ❑Drive at safe speeds.

[SV25750(ALL)08/95] ❑Make sure the spare tire is mounted andanchored properly in the tire carrier withoutcontacting functional parts such as braketubes, fuel lines, exhaust pipes, etc.

*[SV25800(ALL)01/95] If you do not take these precautions, your tiresmay fail or go flat.

*[SV25890(ALL)07/95] Ford Motor Company recommends obeyingposted speed limits.


295


Driving too fast for conditions creates thepossibility of loss of vehicle control.Driving at very high speeds for extendedperiods of time may result in damage tovehicle components.

%*[SV26100(ALL)05/95] At least once a month, check the pressure in allyour vehicle’s tires, including the spare. Use anaccurate tire pressure gauge. Check the tirepressure when tires are cold, after the vehiclehas been parked for at least one hour or hasbeen driven less than 3 miles (5 km). You canfind proper cold pressure and load limits ofrecommended size tires on the SafetyCompliance Certification Label.


Improperly inflated tires can affect vehiclehandling and can fail suddenly, possiblyresulting in loss of vehicle control.

%*[SV26200(ALL)08/95] Tire Inspection and Maintenance

*[SV26300(ALL)02/95] Inspect the tire treads, and remove stones, nails,glass or other objects that may be wedged in thetread grooves. Check for holes or cuts that maypermit air to leak from the tire, and make thenecessary repairs.

*[SV26400(ALL)10/89] Inspect the tire side walls for cuts, bruises andother damage. If you suspect internal damage tothe tire, have it demounted and checked. Youmay need to repair or replace it.


296

*[SV26410(ALL)07/95] Wheel Inspection and Maintenance

*[SV26420(ALL)11/89] Check for damage that would affect the runoutof the wheels. Wobble or shimmy will eventuallydamage the wheel bearings.

*[SV26430(ALL)06/93] Front wheel bearings require periodic repackingand adjustment as specified in the MaintenanceSchedule and Record booklet. Loose or worn frontwheel bearings tend to let the vehicle wander orshimmy, and can eventually cause excessive tirewear.

*[SV26435(ALL)06/95] Whenever a wheel is removed and thenre-installed, always remove any corrosion thatmay be present on the mounting surface of thewheel and/or the surface of the hub, drum orrotor that contacts the wheel.


Installing wheels without goodmetal-to-metal contact at the wheelmounting surface can cause the wheel lugnuts to loosen and could allow the wheelto come off while the vehicle is in motion.

[SV26447(ALL)05/95] RWARNING

On-vehicle wheel balancing will causedamage to the drivetrain of E-4WDAerostars.


297

%*[SV26450(ALL)03/95] Traction-Lok Rear Axle (If equipped)

*[SV26460(ALL)03/95] This axle provides added drive away traction onslippery surfaces, particularly when one or morewheels are on a surface with poor traction.


To avoid injury, never run the enginewith one wheel off the ground, such aswhen changing a tire.

%*[SV26500(ALL)02/95] Tire Rotation

*[SV26600(ALL)03/95] Because your vehicle’s front and rear tiresperform different jobs, they often weardifferently. To make sure your tires wear evenlyand last longer, rotate them at the mileageshown in the Maintenance Schedule and Recordbooklet which came with your vehicle.

*[SV26700(ALL)07/92] Rotate the tires according to the followingdiagram. If you notice that the tires wearunevenly, have them checked. If your light truckhas a temporary spare tire, do not include it inthe tire rotation pattern.

*[SV26750(ALL)03/90] In situations where the tires differ from front torear (snow/traction), simply rotate using a sideto side pattern.


298

*[SV26800(ALL)06/93]


Tire rotation pattern

*[SV26900(ALL)10/89] After each rotation, adjust individual tirepressure as specified on the Safety ComplianceCertification Label. Tighten wheel lug nuts to therequired torque specification and retighten againafter 500 miles (800 km).

*[SV27000(ALL)08/95] If your vehicle has aluminum wheels, you maydemount the full size, non-temporary sparetire (if so equipped) and remount on analuminum wheel to rotate the spare tire intoyour vehicle’s rotation pattern. Rebalance thewheel.

*[SV27100(ALL)03/95] You may discover uneven outside shoulder wearon your vehicle’s front radial tires if you driveoften in the city and turn frequently aroundcurbs. You can extend the life of your front tiresby remounting them so the outside of the tirefaces inside on the wheel rim.


299

%*[SV27300(ALL)04/95] Replacing the Tires

*[SV27400(ALL)05/95] Replace any tires that show wear bands. Whenyour tire shows a wear band, it has only 1/16inch (2 mm) of tread left.

*[SV27500(ALL)10/89]


Wear band

*[SV27600(ALL)01/95] Because your vehicle’s tires may wear unevenly,you may need to replace them before a wearband appears across the entire tread. Some spotswear more heavily than others.

*[SV27700(ALL)03/90] Your wheels and tires are match-mounted forimproved ride. Before you begin to repair a tire,mark the wheel and tire so that they areproperly aligned when remounted. This willensure that the tires will continue to give youthe same ride level.


When replacing full size tires, never mixradial, bias-belted, or bias-type tires. Useonly the tire sizes that are listed on thetire pressure decal. Make sure that all tiresare the same size, speed rating, andload-carrying capacity. Use only the tirecombinations recommended on the decal.If you do not follow these precautions,your vehicle may not drive properly andsafely.


300


Make sure that all replacement tires are ofthe same size, type, load-carrying capacity,and tread design (e.g. “All Terrain”, etc.),as originally offered by Ford.


Do not replace your tires with “highperformance” tires or larger size tires.


Failure to follow these precautions mayadversely affect the handling of thevehicle and make it easier to lose controland roll over.

*[SV27900(ALL)01/95] Tires that are larger or smaller than yourvehicle’s original tires may also affect theaccuracy of your speedometer.


301

[SV28100(ALL)03/90]

three fourths page art:0020366-E

Tire identification chart


Use of aftermarket wheel assemblies maydamage your vehicle or cause accidentsresulting in serious injuries.


302

%*[SV28800(ALL)04/95] Wheel and Tire Matching

*[SV28950(ALL)03/95] See an authorized tire dealer for properservicing procedures. Wheels and tires must beproperly removed, matched and remounted tomaintain the best possible ride.

%*[SV31100(ALL)04/95] Snow Tires and Chains

*[SV31200(ALL)01/95] The tires on your vehicle have all-weather treadsthat provide traction in rain or snow. However,during the winter months in some climates, youmay need to use snow tires and occasionallychains for your tires.


Snow tires must be the same size andgrade as the tires you currently have onyour vehicle.

*[SV31400(ALL)02/95] Do not use chains when using a temporaryspare. For full size tires, use chains on the tiresonly in an emergency or if the law requiresthem where you live. When you use the tirechains:

*[SV31500(ALL)01/95] ❑Make sure the chains are the right size foryour tires. Use only SAE Class “S” chains.Other types may damage your vehicle.

*[SV31550(ALL)08/93] ❑Tire chains may scratch or chip aluminumwheels. IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT TIRECHAINS ARE INSTALLED ON STEELWHEELS ONLY. Be sure to remove wheelcovers (if equipped) from steel rims beforeusing tire chains to avoid scratches ordamage.

*[SV31575(ALL)11/94] ❑Local regulations may prohibit or restrict theuse of tire chains. Investigate the laws andregulations in your area before installingchains.


303

[SV31625(ALL)03/95] ❑Put the chains on tightly with the ends helddown securely. Verify that no chain touchesany wiring, brake lines or fuel lines.Retighten the chains after driving 1/2 mile(0.8 km). Follow the chain manufacturer’sinstructions.

*[SV31650(ALL)07/94] ❑Do not drive faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)or the chain manufacturer’s recommendedspeed limit, whichever is lower. Avoidbumps, holes and sharp turns. If you canhear the chains rub or bang against yourvehicle, remove the chains to prevent damageto your vehicle.

*[SV31750(ALL)11/94] ❑Tire chains may affect vehicle handling. Drivecarefully and avoid hard braking.

*[SV31800(ALL)10/94] ❑Avoid fully loading your vehicle if possible.

*[SV31900(ALL)05/94] ❑Remove tire chains at the first opportunityafter using them on snow and ice. Do not usethe chains on dry roads.

*[SV31950(ALL)05/91] ❑Make sure your suspension insulation andbumpers are not missing or worn to avoiddamage to your vehicle.

%*[SV31960(ALL)04/95] Cleaning the Wheels

*[SV31965(ALL)05/95] Wash the wheels with the same detergent youuse to wash your vehicle’s body. Do not useacid-based wheel cleaners, steel wool, abrasives,fuel, or strong detergents. These substances willdamage protective coatings. Use tar and road oilremover to remove grease and tar.

*[SV31967(ALL)04/95] NOTE: Before going to a car wash, find out ifthe brushes are abrasive.


304

*[SV31968(ALL)03/95] If you have whitewall tires that are difficult toclean with regular detergent, use Ford ExtraStrength Whitewall Tire Cleaner or equivalent.Follow the directions on the container and rinsethe tires with plenty of clean water.

%*[SV32100(ALL)03/95] Battery

*[SV32200(ALL)02/95] Your vehicle may have a Motorcraftmaintenance-free battery. The Motorcraftmaintenance-free battery does not requireadditional water during its life of service. Thevents are part of the cover and cannot beremoved. For longer, trouble-free operation, keepthe top of the battery clean and dry. Also, makecertain the battery cables are tightly fastened tothe battery terminals.

*[SV32300(ALL)02/95] If you see any corrosion on the battery cables orterminals, remove the cables from the terminaland clean them both with a wire brush. You canneutralize the acid with a solution of bakingsoda and water. Reinstall the cables when youare done cleaning them, and apply a smallquantity of grease to the top of each batteryterminal to help prevent corrosion.

*[SV32400(ALL)07/95] Battery replacement

*[SV32500(ALL)02/95] If your original equipment battery requiresreplacement (under warranty), it may in somecases be replaced by a Motorcraftlow-maintenance battery. The low-maintenancebattery has removable vent caps for checking theelectrolyte level and for adding water, if needed.

*[SV32600(ALL)07/95] Check your battery’s electrolyte level, at leastevery 12 months or 12,000 miles (20,000 km), intemperatures up to 90˚F (32˚C) and more oftenin temperatures above 90˚F (32˚C). Keep theelectrolyte in each cell up to the “level”indicator. Do not overfill the battery cell.


305

*[SV32700(ALL)02/95] If the electrolyte level in your battery gets low,you can add plain tap water to the battery, aslong as you don’t use hard water, or water witha high mineral or alkali content. If possible,however, try to only fill the battery cell withdistilled water. If the battery needs water often,have the charging system checked.

%*[SV32725(ALL)03/95] Help Us Protect Our Environment

*[SV32750(ALL)04/95] Ford Motor Company strongly recommends thatused lead-acid batteries be returned to anauthorized recycling facility for disposal.

*[SV32775(ALL)03/95]


Battery recycling symbol

%*[SV32900(ALL)05/95] Because your vehicle’s engine is electronicallycontrolled by a computer, some controlconditions are maintained by power from thebattery. If you ever disconnect the battery, installa new battery, or experience a dead battery youmust allow the computer to “relearn” its idleconditions before your vehicle will driveproperly. To let the engine do this, put thegearshift in P (Park), turn off all the accessories,and start the vehicle. Let the engine idle for atleast one minute.

*[SV33000(ALL)03/95] If you do not let the engine relearn its idle, theidle quality of your vehicle may be adverselyaffected until the idle is relearned. Your vehiclewill eventually relearn its idle while you driveit, but it takes much longer than if you use theprevious procedure.


306


Batteries normally produce explosive gaseswhich can cause personal injury.Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks orlit tobacco to come near the battery. Whencharging or working near a battery, alwayscover your face and protect your eyes, andalso provide ventilation.


Batteries contain sulfuric acid which burnsskin, eyes, and clothing.

*[SV33310(ALL)07/95] If the acid touches someone’s skin, eyes, orclothing, immediately flush the area with waterfor at least 15 minutes. If someone swallows theacid, have him or her drink lots of milk or waterfirst, then Milk of Magnesia, a beaten egg, orvegetable oil. Call a doctor immediately.


Applying too much pressure on the endswhen lifting a battery could cause acid tospill. Lift the battery with a carrier orwith your hands on the opposite corners.

%*[SV33500(ALL)01/95] Automatic Transmission Fluid

*[SV33601(ALL)06/95] Under normal driving conditions automatictransmission fluid should be changed every30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 21,000 miles(34,000 km) if under severe duty conditions.However, if the transmission is not workingproperly, for instance, the transmission may slipor shift slowly, or you may notice some sign offluid leakage, the fluid level should be checked.


307

*[SV33701(ALL)05/95] It is preferable to check the transmission fluidlevel at normal operating temperature, afterapproximately 20 miles (30 km) of driving.However, if necessary, you can check the fluidlevel without having to drive 20 miles to obtaina normal operating temperature if outsidetemperatures are above 50˚F (10˚C).

*[SV33801(ALL)01/95] NOTE: If the vehicle has been operated for anextended period at high speeds or incity traffic during hot weather, orpulling a trailer, the vehicle should beturned off for about 30 minutes toallow the fluid to cool before checking.

%*[SV33901(ALL)02/95] Checking the Automatic TransmissionFluid

*[SV33910(ALL)06/95] With the vehicle on a level surface, start theengine and move the transmission shift selectorthrough all of the gear ranges allowing sufficienttime for each position to engage. Securely latchthe transmission shift selector in the P (Park)position, fully set the parking brake and leavethe engine running.


Your vehicle should not be driven if thefluid level is below the bottom hole onthe dipstick and outside temperatures areabove 50˚F (10˚C).

*[SV33940(ALL)02/95] Wipe off the dipstick cap (located toward thepassenger’s side of the engine), pull the dipstickout and wipe the indicator end clean. Put thedipstick back into the filler tube and make sureit is fully seated. Pull the dipstick out and readthe fluid level.


308

*[SV33950(ALL)03/90] When checking fluid at normal operatingtemperature, the fluid level should be within thecrosshatched area on the dipstick. When thevehicle has not been driven, and outsidetemperature is above 50˚F (10˚C), the fluid levelshould be between the holes on the dipstick.

%*[SV33960(ALL)08/95] Adding Automatic Transmission Fluid

*[SV33970(ALL)03/94] The fluid type is stamped on the dipstick.Before adding any fluid, be sure that thecorrect type will be used.

*[SV33980(ALL)10/89] Add fluid in 1/2 pint (.25L) increments throughthe filler tube to bring the level to the correctarea on the dipstick. If an overfill occurs, excessfluid should be removed by a qualifiedtechnician.

%*[SV33990(ALL)04/95] NOTE: Always dispose of used automotivefluids in a responsible manner. Followyour community’s standards fordisposing of these types of fluids. Callyour local recycling center to find outabout recycling automotive fluids.

*[SV34000(ALL)06/92]

quarter page art:0020372-E

Automatic transmission dipstick


309

[SV35800(ALL)07/95] Driveline Universal Joint and SlipYoke

*[SV36000(ALL)06/93] The universal joints that come standard withyour vehicle do not require lubrication. If youroriginal equipment universal joints are replacedwith universal joints equipped with greasefittings, lubrication will be necessary at theintervals shown in the Maintenance Schedule andRecord booklet.

%*[SV36300(ALL)03/95] Brake Fluid

*[SV36350(ALL)05/90] Your vehicle is equipped with a brake fluid levelindicator in the master cylinder which lights theBRAKE warning light on the instrument panelwhen the brake fluid level is low.

*[SV36400(ALL)03/95] Under normal circumstances, your vehicleshould not use up brake fluid rapidly. However,expect the level of the brake fluid to slowly fallas you put more mileage on your vehicle andthe brake pads wear.

*[SV36500(ALL)08/95] Check the brake fluid at least once a year. Youcan do this by looking at the fluid level in theplastic brake fluid reservoir on the mastercylinder. The fluid level should be at or near theMAX mark.


Brake fluid is toxic.

*[SV36560(ALL)07/95] If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes withrunning water for 15 minutes. Get medicalattention if irritation persists. If taken internally,drink water and induce vomiting. Get medicalattention immediately.


310

%*[SV36600(ALL)02/95] If the fluid is low, carefully clean and removethe filler cap from the reservoir. Fill thereservoir to the MAX line with Ford HighPerformance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AAor DOT 3 equivalent fluid meeting Fordspecification ESA-M6C25-A.

*[SV36850(ALL)12/91] NOTE: If brake fluid is spilled on paintedsurfaces, it must be flushed and wipedaway immediately. Brake fluid maydissolve the paint finish on yourvehicle.


If you use a brake fluid that is not DOT3, you will cause permanent damage toyour brakes.

*[SV37000(ALL)01/95] Do not fill the reservoir above the MAX line.

*[SV37100(ALL)01/95] If you find that the fluid level is excessively low— below the seam or ridge on the outside of theplastic reservoir — have the brake systeminspected.


Do not let the reservoir for the mastercylinder run dry. This may cause thebrakes to fail.

[SV37300(ALL)08/95]


Brake master cylinder reservoir


311

%*[SV37600(ALL)03/95] Power Steering Fluid

*[SV37700(ALL)01/95] Check the level of the power steering fluid atleast twice a year (i.e., every Spring and Fall).

%*[SV37800(ALL)03/95] Checking and Adding Power SteeringFluid

*[SV37900(ALL)02/95] 1. Start the engine and let it run until thepower steering fluid reaches normaloperating temperature. The power steeringfluid will be at the right temperature whenthe engine coolant temperature gauge in theinstrument cluster is near the center of theNORMAL operating temperature range.

*[SV38000(ALL)01/95] 2. While the engine idles, turn the steeringwheel back and forth several times. Makesure that the cap assembly is installed at thistime.

*[SV38100(ALL)05/95] 3. Turn the engine off.

%*[SV38200(ALL)03/94] 4. Check the fluid level on the dipstick (whichis highlighted in yellow in your vehicle). Thefluid level should be between the arrows inthe FULL HOT range, which is marked onthe side of the dipstick, opposite the sidemarked FULL COLD. Do not add fluid if thelevel is within the FULL HOT range.


312

*[SV38250(ALL)03/94]


Power steering dipstick

[SV38525(ALL)05/94]


Power steering reservoir

[SV38550(ALL)05/94]


Power steering reservoir


313

*[SV38800(ALL)07/94] 5. If the power steering fluid is low, add fluidin small amounts, continuously checking thelevel, until you reach the FULL HOT range.Do not overfill.

*[SV38850(ALL)03/95] 6. When you are finished, put the dipstick backin and make sure that it fits snugly.

[SV38900(ALL)06/95] Use only a power steering fluid such as FordPower Steering Fluid Motorcraft MERCONHATF.

*[SV39200(ALL)01/95] If the power steering fluid is low, do not driveyour vehicle for a long period of time beforeadding fluid. This can damage the powersteering pump.

*[SV39400(ALL)02/95] If you check the power steering fluid when it iscold, make sure that the fluid reaches the FULLCOLD range on the dipstick. The reading willonly be accurate if the fluid temperature isapproximately 50 to 85˚F (10 to 30˚C).

*[SV39405(ALL)06/93] NOTE: Do not turn the steering wheel of yourvehicle with the engine off. It couldforce power steering fluid out from thereservoir cap or in extreme cases, itcould unseat the cap.

%*[SV39500(ALL)03/95] Fuses

*[SV39600(ALL)12/91] Fuses and circuit breakers protect your vehicle’selectrical system from overloading. If electricalparts in your vehicle are not working, thesystem may have been overloaded and blown afuse or tripped a circuit breaker. Before youreplace or repair any electrical parts, check theappropriate fuses or circuit breakers.

*[SV39700(ALL)10/89] The following charts tell you which fuses orcircuit breakers protect each electrical part ofyour vehicle. If a fuse blows or a circuit breakeropens a circuit, all the parts of your vehicle thatuse that circuit will not work.


314

[SV39900(ALL)06/95]

thirty-six pica chart:0020388-L


315

[SV40000(ALL)08/95]

fourteen pica chart:0095064-A


316

[SV40050(ALL)06/95]

full page art:0020516-I

Fuses and their location (under instrument panel ondriver’s side)


317

[SV40060(ALL)08/95]

thirty-two pica chart:0095066-A


318

[SV40070(ALL)08/95]



319

[SV40080(ALL)08/95]

ten pica chart:0095068-A


320

[SV40600(ALL)08/95]



321

*[SV40700(ALL)05/95] To remove and replace a fuse, use the fusepuller provided.

[SV43500(ALL)06/95]


The side view of a fuse


Always replace a fuse with one that hasthe specified amperage rating. Using afuse with a higher amperage rating cancause severe wire damage and could starta fire.

[SV43810(ALL)10/90] Access to the trailer tow fuse is through the rearmost storage compartment in the side trimpanel. This is on the left for all Aerostar models.

[SV43820(ALL)03/95] 1. Remove the screws located inside thecompartment and take off the access holecover.

[SV43830(ALL)03/95] 2. Reach in through access hole to removefuses. The fuses are located on the side ofthe bracket assembly.

[SV43840(ALL)03/95] 3. Replace fuses with standard push-in fuses(plug type).

[SV43850(ALL)03/95] 4. Reinstall compartment back and screw intoplace.

*[SV44000(ALL)01/95] Even after you replace a fuse, it will continue toblow if you do not find what caused theoverload. If the fuse continues to blow, haveyour electrical system checked.


322

%*[SV44100(ALL)03/95] Circuit Breakers

[SV44200(ALL)08/95] If you need to check a circuit breaker, locate thefuse panel first. Otherwise, locate the circuitbreaker according to the instructions on thecharts given earlier in this chapter.

*[SV44400(ALL)10/92] However, you should know that the circuitbreakers will reset themselves and allow theelectrical parts to work again once the overloadon the circuit is removed. If the circuit breakerscontinue to cut off electricity, have your vehicle’selectrical system checked.

*[SV44450(ALL)02/95] Diagnostic equipment is needed to check circuitbreakers. Refer to the manufacturer’sinstructions.

[SV44500(ALL)08/95] If you replace a circuit breaker, use one with thesame amperage rating. To remove a circuitbreaker, grip it with your finger and thumb andpull it straight out of its socket.

%*[SV44600(ALL)03/95] Lights and Bulb Replacement

*[SV44700(ALL)01/95] It is a good idea to check the operation of thefollowing lights frequently:

*[SV44800(ALL)01/95] ❑headlamps

*[SV44850(ALL)02/95] ❑high-mount brakelamp

*[SV44900(ALL)01/95] ❑ tail lamps

*[SV45000(ALL)01/95] ❑brakelamps

*[SV45100(ALL)01/95] ❑hazard flasher

*[SV45200(ALL)01/95] ❑ turn signals

*[SV45300(ALL)01/95] ❑ license plate lamp


323

%*[SV45400(ALL)01/95] The alignment of your headlamps should bechecked if:

*[SV45500(ALL)01/95] ❑oncoming motorists frequently signal you toturn off your vehicle’s high beams when youdo not have the high beams on

*[SV45600(ALL)01/95] ❑ the headlamps do not seem to give youenough light to see clearly at night

*[SV45700(ALL)01/95] ❑ the headlamp beams are pointed substantiallyaway from a position slightly down and tothe right

%*[SV45800(ALL)03/95] Headlamp Bulb

*[SV45900(ALL)01/95] The headlamps on your vehicle use replaceablebulbs. When the lamp burns out, simply replacethe bulb, rather than the whole lamp.


Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefullyand keep out of children’s reach. Graspthe bulb only by its plastic base and donot touch the glass. The oil from yourhand could cause the bulb to break thenext time the headlamps are operated.

*[SV46050(ALL)12/91] NOTE: If the bulb is accidently touched, itshould be cleaned with rubbingalcohol before being used.

*[SV46100(ALL)01/95] Do not remove the burned-out bulb unless youcan immediately replace it with a new one. If abulb is removed for an extended period of time,contaminants may enter the headlamp housingand affect its performance.


324

*[SV46300(ALL)03/95] Removing the headlamp bulb

*[SV46400(ALL)01/95] 1. Make sure that the headlamp switch on theinstrument panel is in the OFF position.

[SV46675(ALL)06/95] 2. Remove the screws that attach the headlamptrim to the vehicle.

[SV46750(ALL)03/91] 3. Remove the headlamp trim.

[SV46820(ALL)03/91] 4. Remove the four screws (two on top andtwo on bottom) that attach the headlamp tothe vehicle.

[SV46830(ALL)03/91]


[SV46840(ALL)03/91] NOTE: Do not disturb the aim adjustingscrews.

[SV46860(ALL)03/91] 5. Pull the headlamp away from the vehicleand remove the electrical connector bypulling rearward.

[SV46880(ALL)08/95] 6. Unsnap the bulb retaining wire and carefullyremove the bulb assembly from its socket bygently pulling it out without turning it.


325

[SV46890(ALL)03/91]


*[SV46900(ALL)03/95] Installing the headlamp bulb

*[SV47000(ALL)02/95] 1. With the flat side of the bulb’s plastic basefacing upward, insert the glass end of thebulb into the socket. You may need to turnthe bulb left or right to line up the groovesin the plastic base with the tabs in thesocket. When the grooves are aligned, pushthe bulb into the socket until the plastic basecontacts the rear of the socket.

[SV47150(ALL)03/91] 2. Snap the retaining wire over both sides ofthe bulb and connect the electrical connector.

[SV47275(ALL)03/91] 3. Position the headlamp on the vehicle andinstall the four attaching screws.

*[SV47300(ALL)02/95] 4. Turn the headlamps on and make sure thatthey work properly. If the headlamp wascorrectly aligned before you changed thebulb, you should not need to align it again.


326

[SV47310(ALL)08/95] Removing the High-Mount BrakelampBulb

[SV47315(ALL)05/94] Liftgate models

[SV47317(ALL)08/95] To remove the brakelamp and bulb:

*[SV47330(ALL)03/93] 1. Remove the two screws from the surface ofthe lens.

*[SV47340(ALL)03/93] 2. After removing the screws, remove the lampassembly.

[SV47353(ALL)07/93] 3. Disconnect the high-mount brakelamp wiringconnector.

[SV47356(ALL)03/93] 4. Remove the screw retaining the bulb holderassembly, pull the bulb holder assemblyaway from the lamp, and pull the bulbstraight out of the holder.

*[SV47360(ALL)03/95] To replace/install the brakelamp:

[SV47367(ALL)03/93] 1. Push bulb(s) into bulb holder assembly.

[SV47373(ALL)03/93] 2. Place bulb holder assembly on lamp andinstall retaining screw. Tighten screw.

[SV47376(ALL)07/93] 3. Connect the high-mount brakelamp wiringconnector.

[SV47377(ALL)03/93] 4. Position the lamp assembly on the vehicle.

[SV47378(ALL)03/93] 5. Install and tighten the two screws.

[SV47380(ALL)08/95] 6. Apply brakes to confirm the brakelamp isfunctional after installing.


327

[SV47381(ALL)06/95]


Replacing the high-mount brakelamp bulb — liftgatemodels only

[SV47383(ALL)05/94] Dual Rear Door Models

*[SV47384(ALL)03/95] To remove the brakelamp:

*[SV47385(ALL)03/93] 1. Remove the two screws from the surface ofthe lens.

[SV47386(ALL)03/93] 2. Pull the lens assembly out of the lamphousing.

[SV47387(ALL)03/93] 3. Pull the bulb socket out of the lens assembly.It is not necessary to twist the socket.

[SV47388(ALL)03/93] 4. Pull the bulb out of the socket.


328

*[SV47389(ALL)03/95] To replace/install the brakelamp:

[SV47396(ALL)03/93] 1. Push the bulb into the socket.

[SV47397(ALL)03/93] 2. Push the socket into the lens assembly.

[SV47398(ALL)03/93] 3. Install the lens assembly into lamp.

[SV47399(ALL)03/93] 4. Install and tighten the two screws.

[SV47400(ALL)08/95]


Replacing the high-mount brakelamp bulb — dual reardoor models only


329

*[SV47625(ALL)03/95] Bulb Specifications

[SV47650(ALL)06/95]

thirty pica chart:0095029-A


330

[SV47675(ALL)06/95]



331

%*[SV48600(ALL)03/95] Emission Control System

*[SV48700(ALL)05/95] Your vehicle is equipped with a catalyticconverter which enables your vehicle to complywith applicable exhaust emission requirements.

*[SV48800(ALL)05/95] To make sure that the catalytic converter and theother emission control parts continue to workproperly:

*[SV48900(ALL)01/95] ❑Use only unleaded fuel.

*[SV49000(ALL)01/95] ❑Avoid running out of fuel.

*[SV49100(ALL)01/95] ❑Do not turn off the ignition while yourvehicle is moving, especially at high speeds.

*[SV49200(ALL)03/95] ❑Have the services listed in your MaintenanceSchedule and Record booklet performedaccording to the specified schedule.


Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle indry grass or other dry ground cover. Theemission system heats up the enginecompartment and exhaust system, whichcan start a fire.


On vehicles without original equipmentfloor covering or insulation, do not letpassengers ride in your truck in a mannerthat allows contact between skin and themetal floor.

*[SV49500(ALL)05/95] Watch for fluid leaks, strange odors, smoke, lossof oil pressure, the charge warning light, thecheck engine light, or the temperature warninglight. These sometimes indicate that the emissionsystem is not working properly.


332

*[SV49600(ALL)01/95] Do not make any unauthorized changes to yourvehicle or engine. Changes that cause moreunburned fuel to reach the exhaust system canincrease the temperature of the engine orexhaust system.

*[SV49700(ALL)01/95] By law, anyone who manufactures, repairs,services, sells, leases, trades vehicles, orsupervises a fleet of vehicles is not permitted tointentionally remove an emission control deviceor prevent it from working. In some of theUnited States and in Canada, vehicle ownersmay be liable if their emission control device isremoved or is prevented from working.

*[SV49800(ALL)02/92] Never use a metal exhaust collector when youservice your vehicle. If the metal collectorcontacts any of your vehicle’s plastic trim orbumper parts they could melt or deform.

*[SV49900(ALL)01/95] Do not drive your vehicle if it does not operateproperly. See your dealer if the engine runs onfor more than five seconds after you shut it offor if it misfires, surges, stalls, or backfires.

%*[SV50000(ALL)05/95] Information about your vehicle’s emissioncontrol system is on the Vehicle EmissionControl Information decal located on or near theengine. This decal identifies engine displacementand gives some tune-up specifications.

%*[SV50010(ALL)07/95] Readiness for Inspection/MaintenanceTesting

*[SV50020(ALL)07/95] In some localities it may become a legalrequirement to pass anInspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of theOn-Board Diagnostic (OBD) II system. If thevehicle’s powertrain system or its battery hasjust been serviced, the OBD II system is reset toa not ready for I/M testing condition. Toprepare for I/M testing, the law specifies a“need for additional mixed city and highway


333

driving to complete the check” of the OBD IIsystem. As soon as all of the OBD II systemchecks are successfully completed, the OBD IIsystem is set to the ready condition. The amountof driving required to reach the ready conditionvaries with individual driving patterns. Tocomplete this requirement in the minimumamount of time, refer to the OBD II Drive Cycledefined below. If the vehicle owner cannot ordoes not want to do the additional drivingrequired by law, a service center can performthis drive cycle as it would any other type ofrepair work.

*[SV50030(ALL)07/95] OBD II Drive Cycle

*[SV50040(ALL)06/95] The following steps must be run in the ordershown. If any steps are interrupted, repeat thepreceding step. Any safe driving mode isacceptable between steps.

*[SV50050(ALL)06/95] Always drive vehicle in safe manner accordingto traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws.

[SV50055(ALL)08/95] NOTE: When instructions read “in drive,” usethe standard Overdrive gear. It is notnecessary to turn Overdrive off withthe OVERDRIVE OFF button. For moreinformation on Overdrive, refer to theAutomatic Overdrive Transmissionsection of the Driving Your Aerostarchapter.

*[SV50060(ALL)07/95] The engine must be warmed up and atoperating temperature before proceeding withthe drive modes of the following OBD II DriveCycle.

*[SV50070(ALL)06/95] 1. Start the engine. Drive or idle (in neutral)the vehicle for 4 minutes.

*[SV50080(ALL)06/95] 2. Idle the vehicle in drive for 40 seconds.

*[SV50090(ALL)07/95] 3. Accelerate the vehicle to 45 mph (70 km/h)at 1/4 to 1/2 throttle for 10 seconds.


334

*[SV50100(ALL)07/95] 4. Drive the vehicle with a steady throttle at45 mph (70 km/h) for 30 seconds.

*[SV50110(ALL)06/95] 5. Idle the vehicle in drive for 40 seconds.

*[SV50120(ALL)07/95] 6. Continue to drive the vehicle in city traffic atspeeds between 25 and 40 mph(40-60 km/h) for 15 minutes. During the 15minute drive cycle the following modes mustbe achieved:

*[SV50130(ALL)07/95] a. at least 5 stop and idle modes at 10seconds each

*[SV50140(ALL)07/95] b. acceleration from idles at 1/4 to 1/2throttle position, and

*[SV50150(ALL)07/95] c. choose 3 different speeds to do 1.5minute steady state throttle drives.

*[SV50160(ALL)07/95] 7. Accelerate the vehicle up to between 45 and60 mph (70-100 km/h). This should takeapproximately 5 minutes.

*[SV50170(ALL)07/95] 8. Drive vehicle and hold the throttle steady atthe selected speed between 45 and 60 mph(70-100 km/h) for approximately 5 minutes.

*[SV50180(ALL)07/95] 9. Drive the vehicle for 5 minutes at varyingspeeds between 45 and 60 mph(70-100 km/h).

*[SV50190(ALL)07/95] 10. Bring the vehicle back to idle. Idle in Drivefor 40 seconds.

*[SV50200(ALL)07/95] 11. OBD II drive cycle has been completed.Vehicle can be turned off when convenient.


335

*[SV51500(ALL)07/95] Refill Capacities, Motorcraft Parts,and Lubricant Specifications

%*[SV51600(ALL)07/95] Refill Capacities

[SV51700(ALL)08/95]

26 pica chart:0095044-B


336

[SV51750(ALL)08/95]

twenty pica chart:0095001-B


337

%*[SV52800(ALL)05/95] Motorcraft Parts

[SV52900(ALL)08/95]

eighteen pica chart:0095002-A


338

%*[SV53500(ALL)05/95] Lubricant Specifications[SV53600(ALL)08/95]

thirty-six pica chart:0095043-B


339

[SV53650(ALL)08/95]

twelve pica chart:0095058-A


340

[SV53700(ALL)08/95]

thirty-six pica chart:0095003-B


341

[SV53800(ALL)08/95]

26 pica chart:0095025-A


342

[SV53850(ALL)08/95]

eighteen pica chart:0095074-A

%*[SV56000(ALL)01/95] Vehicle Storage

*[SV56100(ALL)01/95] Maintenance Tips

*[SV56150(ALL)01/95] If you plan on storing your vehicle for anextended period of time (60 days or more), referto the following maintenance recommendationsto ensure your vehicle stays in good operatingcondition.

*[SV56200(ALL)01/95] General

*[SV56300(ALL)01/95] ❑Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated place.

*[SV56400(ALL)01/95] ❑Protect from sunlight, if possible.

*[SV56500(ALL)01/95] ❑ If vehicles are stored outside, they requireregular maintenance to protect against rustand damage.


343

*[SV56600(ALL)01/95] Body

*[SV56700(ALL)01/95] ❑Wash vehicle thoroughly to remove dirt,grease, oil, tar or mud from exterior surfaces,rear wheel housing and underside of frontfenders.

*[SV56800(ALL)01/95] ❑Periodically wash vehicles stored in exposedlocations.

*[SV56900(ALL)01/95] ❑Touch-up raw or primed metal to preventrust.

*[SV57000(ALL)01/95] ❑Cover chrome and stainless steel parts with athick coat of auto wax to preventdiscoloration. Re-wax as necessary when thevehicle is washed.

*[SV57100(ALL)04/95] ❑Lubricate all hood, door and trunk lid hingesand latches with a light grade oil.

*[SV57200(ALL)01/95] ❑Cover interior soft trim to prevent fading.

*[SV57300(ALL)01/95] ❑Keep all rubber parts free from oil andsolvents.

%*[SV57350(ALL)01/95] Engine

*[SV57400(ALL)01/95] ❑Start engine every 15 days. Run at fast idleuntil it reaches normal operating temperature.

*[SV57500(ALL)01/95] ❑With your foot on the brake, shift through allthe gears while the engine is running.

%*[SV57600(ALL)01/95] Fuel system

%*[SV57700(ALL)07/94] ❑Fill fuel tank with high-quality unleaded fueluntil the first automatic shutoff of the fuelpump nozzle.

*[SV57900(ALL)03/95] NOTE: During extended periods of vehiclestorage (60 days or more), fuel maydeteriorate due to oxidation. This candamage rubber and other polymers inthe fuel system and may also clogsmall orifices.


344

*[SV58000(ALL)01/95] Ford Gas Stabilizer should be added wheneveractual or expected storage periods exceed 60days. Follow the instructions on the label. Thevehicle should then be operated at idle speed tocirculate the additive throughout the fuel system.

*[SV58100(ALL)01/95] A volatile corrosion inhibitor added to the fuelsystem will protect the fuel system’s innersurfaces from corrosion. Follow the instructionspackaged with the product.

%*[SV58200(ALL)01/95] Cooling system

*[SV58300(ALL)01/95] ❑Protect against freezing temperatures.

%*[SV58400(ALL)01/95] Battery

*[SV58500(ALL)01/95] ❑Check and recharge as necessary.

*[SV58600(ALL)01/95] ❑Keep connections clean and covered with alight coat of grease.

%*[SV58700(ALL)01/95] Brakes

*[SV58800(ALL)01/95] ❑Make sure brakes and parking brake are fullyreleased.

%*[SV58900(ALL)01/95] Tires

*[SV59000(ALL)05/95] ❑Maintain recommended air pressure.

*[SV59100(ALL)01/95] Miscellaneous

*[SV59200(ALL)01/95] ❑Make sure all linkages, cables, levers andclevis pins under vehicle are covered withgrease to prevent rust.

*[SV59300(ALL)03/95] ❑Move vehicles at least 25 feet (8 m) every 15days to lubricate working parts and preventcorrosion.


345

*[SV99900(ALL)07/95]

thirty-six pica chart:FORDADPLN


351

[QI02500(ALL)08/95]

thirty-twopicachart:0095059-A

File:16cpqia.exU

pdate:T

ue Aug 29 16:32:22 1995

352

[QI02600(ALL)08/95]

fullpageart:0095082-A

Front

exteriorview

File:16cpqia.exU

pdate:T

ue Aug 29 16:32:22 1995

353

[QI03200(ALL)08/95]


Rear

exteriorview

File:16cpqia.exU

pdate:T

ue Aug 29 16:32:22 1995

354

[QI03800(ALL)08/95]


En

trance

view

File:16cpqia.exU

pdate:T

ue Aug 29 16:32:22 1995

355

[QI04400(ALL)08/95]


Driver’s

door

File:16cpqia.exU

pdate:T

ue Aug 29 16:32:22 1995

356

[QI05000(ALL)08/95]


Instru

men

tp

anel

File:16cpqia.exU

pdate:T

ue Aug 29 16:32:22 1995

357

[QI05600(ALL)08/95]


Instru

men

tclu

ster

File:16cpqia.exU

pdate:T

ue Aug 29 16:32:22 1995

358

[QI06200(ALL)08/95]


Rear

cargoarea

File:16cpqia.exU

pdate:T

ue Aug 29 16:32:22 1995

Index 359

Index

A

Accessory position on the ignition . . . . . 61Additives, engine oil . . . . . . . . . . 282Air bag supplemental restraint system . . . 26

and child safety seats . . . . . . . . . . 34description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26, 28disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32driver air bag . . . . . . . . . . . 26, 28indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28proper seating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27service and information labels . . . . . . 28tone generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31wearing safety belts . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Air cleaner filterlocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

Air conditioningauxiliary heater and air conditioner . . . 98manual heating and air conditioning

system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92Alcohol, in fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277Antenna, radio

(see Electronic sound system) . . . 149, 182Antifreeze (see Engine coolant) . . . . . . 284Anti-lock brake system (ABS)

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193see also Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Appeals (see Dispute settlement board) . . 248Assistance (see Customer assistance) . . . 245Audio system

(see Electronic sound system) . . . . . 149Autolamp system (see Headlamps) . . 102, 104

File:cpixa.exUpdate:Tue Aug 29 17:47:05 1995

360 Index

Automatic transmissiondriving an automatic overdrive . . . . . 188fluid, adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308fluid, checking . . . . . . . . . . . . 307fluid, refill capacities . . . . . . . . . 335fluid, specification . . . . . . . . . . . 338

Axlelubricant specifications. . . . . . . . . 338refill capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . 335traction lok . . . . . . . . . . . . 201, 297

B

Backing up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188Basic vehicle warranty . . . . . . . . . . . 4Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

acid, treating emergencies . . . . . 225, 305charging system warning light . . . . . . 81disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228how to service . . . . . . . . . . . . 304jumping a disabled battery . . . . . . . 225maintenance-free . . . . . . . . . . . 304proper disposal, recycling . . . . . . . 305replacement, specifications . . . . . . . 337servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304voltage gauge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82when storing your vehicle . . . . . . . 344

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . 75checking and adding . . . . . . . . . 309description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309specifications . . . . . . . . . . . 310, 338

Brakelamp, high-mount . . . . . . . . . 106Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193anti-lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193applying the brakes . . . . . . . . . . 196brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . 75


Index 361

Brakes (continued)fluid, checking and adding . . . . . . 309fluid, refill capacities . . . . . . . . . 309fluid, specifications . . . . . . . . 310, 338front disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193if brakes do not grip well . . . . . . . 195master cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . 309new brake linings. . . . . . . . . . . . 7noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193, 195parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197power braking . . . . . . . . . . . . 193rear anti-lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195, 309stopping distances . . . . . . . . 196, 198trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219when storing your vehicle . . . . . . . 344

Brake-shift interlock . . . . . . . . . . 66, 187Break-in period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7Brights (high beams) . . . . . . . . . 84, 110Built-in child seat

cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Bulbs, replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322halogen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

CCanada, customer assistance . . . . . . . 253Canada, warranty information . . . . . . . 4Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan

(CAMVAP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253Capacities for refilling fluids . . . . . . . 335Carbon monoxide in exhaust . . . . . . . . 71Car seats for children

(see Child safety seats) . . . . . . . . . 34Cassette tape player (see Electronic

sound system) . . . . . . 163, 169, 175, 177Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . 331CD player (see Electronic sound system) . 156Chains, tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302


362 Index

Changing a tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229Charging system gauge . . . . . . . . . . 82Charging system warning light . . . . . . . 81Child safety restraints . . . . . . . . . . . 32

built-in child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . 48child safety belts . . . . . . . . . . . . 58child safety seats . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Child safety seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34attaching with tether straps . . . . . . . 46automatic locking mode (retractor) . . 15, 34built-in child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . 48in front seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34in rear outboard seat . . . . . . . . . . 34in rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34tether anchorage hardware . . . . . . . . 46

Chimeheadlamps on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84key in ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62safety belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Circuit breakerschecking and replacing . . . . . . . . 322see also fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

Cleaning your vehiclebuilt-in child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . 57CD player and discs. . . . . . . . . . 160chrome and aluminum parts . . . . . . . 9engine compartment. . . . . . . . . . 272exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8exterior lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 102fabric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . 91instrument panel lens . . . . . . . . . 108interior lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . 105mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8rear windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100


Index 363

Cleaning your vehicle (continued)rustproofing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9safety belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23tail lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102upholstery and interior trim . . . . . . 142washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Climate control system . . . . . . . . . . 91air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . 92heating only system. . . . . . . . . . . 95

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155, 171Clutch, specifications . . . . . . . . . . 338Cold engine starting. . . . . . . . . . . . 65Combination lap and shoulder belts . . 11, 13Compact disc player

(see Electronic sound system) . . . . . 156Compact disc radio

(see Electronic sound system) . . . . . 150Console, description . . . . . . . . . . . 145Controls

instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . 89mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144steering column . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Coolant (see Engine coolant) . . . . . . . 284checking and adding . . . . . . . . . 284drain and flush . . . . . . . . . . . . 289preparing for storage . . . . . . . . . 344proper solution . . . . . . . . . . . . 286refill capacities . . . . . . . . . . 289, 335specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . 85warnings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

Cruise control (see Speed control) . . . . 115


364 Index

Customer Assistance Center,Ford (U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Customer Assistance Centre,Ford of Canada . . . . . . . . . . 247, 253

D

Dashboard (see Instrument panel) . . . . . . 89Daytime running light system . . . . . . 104Defects, reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . 252Defrost, rear window . . . . . . . . . . . 99Dipstick

automatic transmission fluid . . . . 306, 308engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . 311

Disabled vehicle (see Towing) . . . . . . 243Dispute Settlement Board . . . . . . . . 248Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

door ajar warning light . . . . . . . . . 77lubricant specifications. . . . . . . . . 338

Driving under special conditions . . . . . 198bad weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200heavy load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202high speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199high water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201slippery roads . . . . . . . . . . . . 200tips for safe driving . . . . . . . . . . 198

E

Electrical systemcircuit breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . 322fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313operating when the engine is off . . . . . 61

Electronic radio with cassette(see Electronic sound system) . . . . . 163

Electronic sound systemradio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . 182tuning the radio . . . . . . . 151, 164, 175warranty and service information. . . . 184


Index 365

Electronic stereo cassette radio(see Electronic sound system) . . . . . 175

Electronic stereo radio(see Electronic sound system) . . . . . 174

Emergencies, roadsideassistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245battery acid spills . . . . . . . . . 225, 306fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Emergency brake (parking brake) . . . . . 197Emission control system . . . . . . . . . 331

catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . 331emissions warranty . . . . . . . . . 4, 331

Enginecheck engine warning light . . . . . . . 78does not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69fuel injected engine, starting . . . . . . . 63fuel pump shut-off switch . . . . . . . . 69preparing to start . . . . . . . . . . . . 64refill capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . 335service points . . . . . . . . . . . . 269starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61, 64starting after a collision . . . . . . . . . 69storing your vehicle. . . . . . . . . . 343

Engine block heater . . . . . . . . . . . . 68Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

checking and adding . . . . . . . . . 284checking hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . 288disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288drain and flush . . . . . . . . . . . . 289preparing for storage . . . . . . . . . 344proper solution . . . . . . . . . . . . 286recovery reservoir . . . . . . . . 269, 284refill capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . 335refill procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . 289specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . 85


366 Index

Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . 85Engine fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266Engine idle speed control . . . . . . . . . 67Engine knocking. . . . . . . . . . . . . 276Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

checking and adding . . . . . . . . . 283dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . 83filter, specifications . . . . . . . . . . 337refill capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . 335specifications . . . . . . . . . . . 282, 338synthetic oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282“break-in” oils . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

Entry system, illuminated . . . . . . . . 107Exhaust fumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71Extended Service Plan, Ford . . . . . . . . 4

F

Fan, engine fan, avoiding injury . . . . . 266Federal Communications Commission . . . 184Federal Highway Administration

Regulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Flashers, hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113Flashing the lamps . . . . . . . . . . . 110Flat tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229Fluid refill capacities . . . . . . . . . . . 335Ford Customer Assistance Center . . . . . 247Ford Dispute Settlement Board . . . . . . 248Ford Extended Service Plan . . . . . . . . 4Ford Motor Company of Canada . . . . . 253Ford of Canada Customer

Assistance Centre . . . . . . . . . . . 253


Index 367

Foreign registration . . . . . . . . . . . 254Four-Wheel Drive vehicles, special notice . . 5French owner guides, how to obtain . . . . 3Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

calculating fuel economy . . . . . . . 280capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335choosing the right fuel . . . . . . . . 276comparisons with EPA fuel

economy estimates . . . . . . . . . 281filling your vehicle with fuel. . . . . . 273filter, specifications . . . . . . . . . . 337fuel filler door release lever . . . . . . 273fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276quality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276running out of fuel . . . . . . . . . . 280safety information relating to

automotive fuels . . . . . . . . . . 278storing your vehicle. . . . . . . . . . 343treating emergencies . . . . . . . . . 278

Fuel cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274replacing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

Fuel filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273override, manual . . . . . . . . . . . 273remote release . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Fuel filter, specifications . . . . . . . . . 337Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84Fuel pump shut-off switch

engine does not start . . . . . . . . . . 69starting after a collision . . . . . . . . . 69

Fuse panels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313Fuses

charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313circuit breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . 322


368 Index

G

Gas cap (see Fuel cap) . . . . . . . . . . 273Gas mileage (see Fuel economy) . . . . . 280Gasohol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277Gasoline (see Fuel). . . . . . . . . . . . 273Gauges

battery voltage gauge . . . . . . . . . . 82charging system gauge . . . . . . . . . 82engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . 85engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . 83fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)calculating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209driving with a heavy load . . . . . . . 202

Gearshiftautomatic operation . . . . . . . . . . 186gearshift override . . . . . . . . . 66, 187locking the gearshift. . . . . . . . . . . 61positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186shifting the gears . . . . . . . . . . . 186shift-lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66, 187

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) . . . 202calculating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209driving with a heavy load . . . . . . . 202


Index 369

HHazard flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113Headlamps

aiming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322autolamp system . . . . . . . . . . . 102checking alignment . . . . . . . . . . 323cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102daytime running lights . . . . . . . . 104flashing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110high beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . 322turning on and off . . . . . . . . . . 101warning chime . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Heatingheating and air conditioning system . . . 92rear seat controls . . . . . . . . . . . . 98standard heater system . . . . . . . . . 95

High beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 101, 110

High-mount brakelamp, description . . . . 106Hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

latch location . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268lubrication specifications. . . . . . . . 338release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268working under the hood . . . . . . . 266

Horn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114Hoses, checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

IIdentification Number, Vehicle (VIN) . . . . 5Idle

relearning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Ignitionchime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62positions of the ignition . . . . . . . . . 61removing the key . . . . . . . . . . . . 62


370 Index

Indicator lights and chimes (see Lights) . . . 73Infant seats (see Safety seats) . . . . . . 32, 34Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108location of components . . . . . . . . . 89registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Integrated child seat(see Built-in child seat) . . . . . . . . . 48

Interval wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

J

Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237, 239positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

Jump-starting your vehicleattaching cables . . . . . . . . . . . . 227disconnecting cables . . . . . . . . . . 228

K

Keyskey in ignition chime . . . . . . . . . . 62positions of the ignition . . . . . . . . . 61removing from the ignition . . . . . . . 62stuck in lock position . . . . . . . . . . 61

L

Lampsautolamp delay system . . . . . . . . 102checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322daytime running light system . . . . . 104flashing the lamps. . . . . . . . . . . 110hazard flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . 113headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101high beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110high-mount brakelamp . . . . . . . . 106illuminated entry system. . . . . . . . 107


Index 371

Lamps (continued)interior lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 101replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . 322trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Lane change indicator (see Turn signal) . . 109Lap belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20Lights, warning and indicator

air bag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75charging system . . . . . . . . . . . . 81check engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78door ajar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77engine oil pressure . . . . . . . . . . . 83hazard warning light . . . . . . . . . 113high beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84oil pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83safety belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77service engine soon . . . . . . . . . . . 78turn signal indicator . . . . . . . . . 109

Load limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202GAWR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202GVWR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202trailer towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Lubricant specifications . . . . . . . . . 338Luggage rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223Lug nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239tightening sequence . . . . . . . . . . 241

Lumbar support, seats . . . . . . . . . . 142Lumbar support pad . . . . . . . . . . 142

M

Maintenance schedule and record(see separate Maintenance Scheduleand Record booklet) . . . . . . . . . . 3

Maintenance (see Servicing) . . . . . . . 265Master cylinder, brakes . . . . . . . . . 309Methanol in fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . 277


372 Index

Mileage, calculating fuel economy. . . . . 280Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

dual electric remote control . . . . . . 144Motorcraft parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

N

National Highway TrafficSafety Administration . . . . . . . . . 252

New vehicle break-in . . . . . . . . . . . 7

O

Octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276Odometer

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337Oil (see Engine oil) . . . . . . . . . . . 282Oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282On-board diagnostic (OBD II) system . . . 332Order forms, service information . . . . . 261Overdrive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188Overseas offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

P

Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Parts (see Motorcraft Parts) . . . . . . . . 337PCV valve, specifications . . . . . . . . . 337Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Power features

door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126lumbar support . . . . . . . . . . . . 142mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127


Index 373

Power steeringdipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311driving with power steering . . . . . . 191fluid, checking and adding . . . . . . 311fluid, specifications . . . . . . . . . . 338servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Prop rod, hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

R

Radio (see Electronic sound systems) . . . 149Rear anti-lock brakes . . . . . . . . . . 194Rear axle

lubricant specification . . . . . . . . . 338refill capacity. . . . . . . . . . . . . 335traction lok. . . . . . . . . . . . 201, 297

Rear climate control system . . . . . . . . 98Rear window

defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99washer reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . 291

Refill capacities for fluids . . . . . . . . 335Regulations, National Highway Traffic

Safety Administration . . . . . . . . . 252Reporting safety defects . . . . . . . . . 252Restraints, safety (see Safety restraints)

adult . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11child. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32infant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 34

Roadside assistance . . . . . . . . . . . 245Roadside emergencies . . . . . . . . . . 225Rotating the tires . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

S

Safe driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . 198Safety belts (see Safety restraints) . . . . . . 11Safety chains, when towing a trailer . . . 219Safety Compliance Certification Label . . . . 5


374 Index

Safety defects, reporting . . . . . . . . . 252Safety information relating to

automotive fuels . . . . . . . . . . . 278Safety restraints

adjusting the safety belts. . . . . . . 13, 21automatic locking mode . . . . . . . . . 15center front lap belt . . . . . . . . . . . 20center rear lap belt . . . . . . . . . . . 20cleaning the safety belts . . . . . . . . . 23extension assembly . . . . . . . . . . . 22for adults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11for children. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32for infants . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 34for pregnant women. . . . . . . . . . . 11lap and shoulder belts . . . . . . . . 11, 13maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22proper use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22untwisting or unjamming

the safety belt . . . . . . . . . . . . 23warning light and chime. . . . . . . . . 77

Safety seats for children . . . . . . . . . . 34attaching with tether straps . . . . . . . 46automatic locking mode (retractor) . . 15, 34built-in child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . 48in front seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34in rear outboard . . . . . . . . . . . . 34in rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34tether anchorage hardware . . . . . . . . 46

Seat belts (see Safety restraints) . . . . . . . 11Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

adjusting the seat, manual . . . . . . . 128child safety seats . . . . . . . . . . . . 34cleaning upholstery . . . . . . . . . . 142lumbar support . . . . . . . . . . . . 142quick release rear captain’s chair . . . . 131reclining the seat . . . . . . . . . . . 128seat/bed conversion . . . . . . . . . . 141


Index 375

Serial number (VIN). . . . . . . . . . . . 5Service concerns . . . . . . . . . . . . 246Servicing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 265

precautions when servicing . . . . . . 266servicing when you tow . . . . . . . . 202

Shift-lock system . . . . . . . . . . . 66, 187Shift positions (see Gearshift). . . . . . . 186Shoulder and lap belts

(see Safety restraints) . . . . . . . . 11, 13Shoulder belts (see Safety restraints) . . . . 13Side mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Snow tires and chains . . . . . . . . . . 302Spare tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

changing the tire . . . . . . . . . 229, 237conventional spare . . . . . . . . . . 229finding the spare . . . . . . . . . . . 231removing the spare tire . . . . . . . . 231storing the flat tire . . . . . . . . 231, 239temporary spare . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Spark plugs, specifications . . . . . . . . 337Special driving conditions . . . . . . . . 198Special notice

E-4WD vehicles. . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Specification chart, lubricants. . . . . . . 338Speed control, when towing a trailer . . . 220Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87Starting your vehicle

preparing to start your vehicle . . . . . . 64starting a cold engine . . . . . . . . . . 65starting after a collision . . . . . . . . . 69starting a warm engine . . . . . . . . . 65starting your vehicle if the battery

is disabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225Steering, power . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191


376 Index

Steering wheelhorn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61speed controls . . . . . . . . . . . . 115tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Storage compartmentscenter console. . . . . . . . . . . . . 145underseat storage drawer . . . . . . . 143

Storing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 342Supplemental air bag readiness light . . . . 81Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) . . . . 26

T

Tail lampsbulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 322cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Temperature control (see Climate control) . . 91Tether anchor installation

(see Child restraints) . . . . . . . . . . 46Tilt steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . 114Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229checking the pressure . . . . . . . . . 294cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303inspection and maintenance . . . . . . 295replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299rotating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297snow tires and chains . . . . . . . . . 302spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229, 231storing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 344tire grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299wear bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299wheel and tire matching . . . . . . . . 302

Towing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 243using wheel dollies . . . . . . . . . . 243with a tow truck . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Traction control . . . . . . . . . . . 201, 297Traction-lok rear axle . . . . . . . . 201, 297


Index 377

Trailer towingcalculating maximum trailer weight . . 211safety chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219trailer brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219trailer lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Transmissionautomatic operation . . . . . . . . . . 186fluid, checking and adding

(automatic) . . . . . . . . . . . . 307fluid, refill capacities . . . . . . . . . 335lubricant specifications . . . . . . . . 338

Transmission control switch . . . . . . . 188Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88Tune-up specifications (VECI) . . . . . . 332Turn signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . 109lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

U

Used engine oil, disposal . . . . . . . . 266

V

Variable interval wipers . . . . . . . . . 110VECI (Vehicle Emission Control Information)

decal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . 5Vehicle loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

calculating the load . . . . . . . . . . 211understanding loading information . . . 207

Vehicle storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342Ventilating your vehicle

(see Climate control) . . . . . . . . . . 91Viscosity (see Engine oil) . . . . . . . . 282Voltmeter (see Battery voltage gauge) . . . . 82


378 Index

W

Warm engine, starting . . . . . . . . . . . 65Warning chimes

headlamps on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84key in ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62safety belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Warning lights (see Lights) . . . . . . . . . 73Warranties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

basic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Canada. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Warranty Information Booklet . . . . . . . 4Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

rear window reservoir . . . . . . . . . 291reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

Weight limits (GAWR, GVWR) . . . . . . 202Wheel and tire matching . . . . . . . . . 302Wheel bearings, lubricant specifications . . 338Wheel dollies (see Towing) . . . . . . . . 243Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239inspection and maintenance . . . . . . 294lug nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127power windows, operating . . . . . . . 127rear, defrosting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99


Index 379

Windshield, washing . . . . . . . . . . 110Windshield washer fluid and wipers . . . 110

checking and adding fluid . . . . . . . 291checking and replacing wiper blades . . 293liftgate reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . 291operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291specifications . . . . . . . . . . . 292, 338variable interval wipers . . . . . . . . 110

Windshield wipers and washer . . . . . . 110Wrecker towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243


380

Service StationInformation

[GS00200(ALL)08/95]

twenty-six pica chart:0095019-B

File:17cpgsa.exUpdate:Tue Aug 29 17:47:17 1995

96aerostar

Documents

optimum powertrain cooling

emission system heats

federal communications commission

remaining unfilled buttons

lug nut wrench

automatic music search

error code appears

steadily increasing force